Dodge 2012 Ram Owners Manual Truck 1500/2500/3500 Owner's

Dodge-2012-Dodge-1500-Owners-Manual-814523 dodge-2012-dodge-1500-owners-manual-814523

2015-09-07

: Dodge Dodge-2012-Ram-Owners-Manual-762140 dodge-2012-ram-owners-manual-762140 dodge pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 730 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Ram TRuck Gas 1500/2500/3500
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’s maNuaL
2 0 1 2
2012 Ram TRuck Gas 1500/2500/3500
12D241-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
875256 Ram Truck Gas OM cover.indd 1 3/16/11 4:33 PM
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of acci-
dents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol
levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t
drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a
friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your per-
ceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your
judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features
and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features
and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered
on this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or im-
provements to its products without imposing any obligation
upon itself to install them on products previously manufac-
tured.
Copyright © 2011 Chrysler Group LLC
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION
............................................................3
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................9
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
............................. 91
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
..................................241
5
STARTING AND OPERATING
................................................369
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
............................................. 581
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
..............................................617
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
.................................................679
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
........................................ 697
10
INDEX
...................................................................707
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵Introduction ........................... 4
䡵How To Use This Manual .................. 4
䡵Warnings And Cautions ................... 6
䡵Van Conversions/Campers ................. 6
䡵Vehicle Identification Number .............. 6
䡵Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ............ 7
1
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine MOPAR威parts, and cares about
your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 5
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS
The Manufacturer’s Warranty does not apply to body
modifications or special equipment installed by van
conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer
to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such
equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,
stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and
service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-
turer.
Operating instructions for the special equipment in-
stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should
also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions
are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for
assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the
applicable manufacturer.
For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:
www.dodgebodybuilder.com. This website contains di-
mensional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It
is intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical
support. For service issues, contact your authorized
dealer.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the bottom
of the frame rail, on the right hand side, near the center
of the vehicle and underbody as well as the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on
your vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.
6 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
Vehicle Identification Number
1
INTRODUCTION 7
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵A Word About Your Keys ................. 12
▫Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) —
If Equipped ......................... 12
▫KeyFob............................ 13
▫Removing Key Fob From Ignition .......... 14
▫Key-In-Ignition Reminder ............... 16
䡵Sentry Key威.......................... 16
▫Replacement Keys ..................... 17
▫Customer Key Programming ............. 18
▫General Information ................... 18
䡵Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped ........ 19
▫Rearming Of The System ................ 19
▫To Arm The System ................... 19
▫To Disarm The System ................. 19
▫Security System Manual Override ......... 20
䡵Illuminated Entry — If Equipped ........... 20
䡵Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If Equipped . . . 21
▫Remote Unlock The Doors ............... 21
2
▫To Lock The Doors .................... 23
▫Using The Panic Alarm ................. 24
▫Programming Additional Transmitters ...... 25
▫Transmitter Battery Replacement .......... 25
▫General Information ................... 26
䡵Remote Starting System — If Equipped ....... 26
▫How To Use Remote Start ............... 27
䡵Door Locks ........................... 30
▫Manual Door Locks ................... 30
▫Power Door Locks — If Equipped ......... 31
▫Child-Protection Door Lock .............. 32
䡵Windows ............................ 34
▫Power Windows — If Equipped ........... 34
▫Wind Buffeting ....................... 37
䡵Occupant Restraints ..................... 38
▫Lap/Shoulder Belts .................... 41
▫Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure .... 49
▫Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 50
▫Center Lap Belts ...................... 50
▫Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions ..... 51
▫Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode –
If Equipped ......................... 52
▫Energy Management Feature ............. 53
▫Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped ...... 53
▫Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) ......................... 54
▫Seat Belts And Pregnant Women .......... 55
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫Seat Belt Extender ..................... 55
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air
Bags .............................. 56
▫Air Bag System Components ............. 57
▫Advanced Front Air Bag Features .......... 58
▫Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . 62
▫Event Data Recorder (EDR) .............. 69
▫Child Restraints ...................... 70
䡵Engine Break-In Recommendations .......... 85
䡵Safety Tips ........................... 85
▫Transporting Passengers ................ 85
▫Exhaust Gas ......................... 86
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle ............................. 87
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle ................... 89
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may use a keyless ignition system. This
system consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and a Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
with integral ignition switch. You can insert the Key Fob
into the ignition switch with either side up.
Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) — If Equipped
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automati-
cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key Fob
The Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the
square end of the key fob into the ignition switch located
on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired posi-
tion. It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in the
rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE transmitter
go dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
4 — START
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
at the top of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinder with either side up.
Removing Key Fob From Ignition
Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
automatic transmission). Turn the Key Fob to the OFF
position and then remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
•
For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and
power outlets will remain active for 45 seconds after
the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 min-
utes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
Emergency Key Removal
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
CAUTION!
•
If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your
Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.
•
Do not attempt to remove the Key Fob while in
this condition, damage could occur to the Key Fob
or ignition module. Only remove the emergency
key for locking and unlocking the doors.
•
Leave the Key Fob in the ignition and either:
•
Jump Start the vehicle.
•
Charge the battery.
WARNING!
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the
ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,
a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob.
NOTE:
•
The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds when the
Key Fob is placed in the OFF or ACC ignition position.
•
If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Cen-
ter (EVIC) the EVIC will display “Key In Ignition”.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and Wireless Ignition
Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid
Key Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The
system will shut the engine off in two seconds if an
invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A Key Fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the light begins to flash after
the bulb check, it indicates that someone used an invalid
Key Fob to try to start the engine. Either of these
conditions will result in the engine being shut off after
two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 sec-
onds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-
tended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE:
•
When having the Sentry Key威Immobilizer System
serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an autho-
rized dealer.
•
If a programmed Key Fob is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining Key Fobs erased from the
system’s memory. This will prevent the lost Key Fobs
from starting your vehicle. The remaining Keys Fobs
must then be reprogrammed.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key威system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-
hicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The system provides both au-
dible and visible signals, for the first three minutes the
horn will sound and the headlights will turn on, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security
Light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes
only, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or
turn signals and Vehicle Security Light will flash.
Rearming Of The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15
additional minutes of headlights turning on and Vehicle
Security Light flashing, if the system has not been
disabled. If the condition which initiated the alarm is still
present, the system will ignore that condition and moni-
tor the remaining doors and ignition.
To Arm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the
power door locks, or use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter to lock the doors. After all the doors are
locked and closed, the Vehicle Security Light in the
instrument panel cluster will flash rapidly for about
16 seconds to indicate that the alarm is being set. After
the alarm is set, the Vehicle Security Light will flash at a
slower rate to indicate that the system is armed.
To Disarm The System
Use the RKE transmitter to unlock the door. If something
has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you unlock the
doors and the exterior lights will blink three times. Check
the vehicle for tampering.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
The Vehicle Security Alarm will also disarm if a pro-
grammed Sentry Key威is inserted into the ignition
switch. To exit the alarming mode, press the RKE trans-
mitter UNLOCK button, or insert a programmed Sentry
Key威into the ignition switch.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
NOTE:
•
The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights do not turn off if the dimmer control is in
the “Dome ON” position (extreme top position).
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
The illuminated entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) — IF
EQUIPPED
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a Key Fob with RKE
transmitter. The transmitter does not need to be pointed
at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE: Inserting the Key Fob with RKE transmitter into
the ignition switch disables the system from responding
to any button presses from that RKE transmitter. Driving
at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above disables the system
from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all
RKE transmitters.
Remote Unlock The Doors
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door (If EVIC is
setup for driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all
doors), or press the unlock button twice within five
Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the
Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause the
alarm to sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate
the Vehicle Security Alarm System.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmit-
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
than ten seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button
while still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the key
removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
To Lock The Doors
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
•
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-
Programmable Features (System Setup)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
•
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE trans-
mitter for at least four seconds, but no longer than ten
seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still hold-
ing the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by press-
ing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the OFF position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to
sound. Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the
Vehicle Security Alarm System.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the
horn will pulse on and off, and the interior lights will
turn on.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•
The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
•
You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•
Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
•
Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down, use a
flat blade screwdriver to pry the two halves of the RKE
transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the seal
during removal.
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
3. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve-
niently from outside the vehicle while still
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
NOTE:
•
The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•
Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE trans-
mitter may reduce this range.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•
Shift lever in PARK
•
Doors closed
•
Hood closed
•
HAZARD switch off
•
BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
•
Ignition key removed from ignition switch
•
Battery at an acceptable charge level
•
RKE PANIC button not pressed
•
Fuel meets minimum requirement
•
System not disabled from previous remote start event
•
Vehicle theft alarm not active
WARNING!
•
Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Car-
bon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
•
Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prema-
turely:
•
Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
•
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
•
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•
Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
•
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the
vehicle has started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.
NOTE:
•
If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
will automatically lock the doors.
•
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
•
The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•
For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•
The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System
(if equipped). Insert the Key Fob into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
in order to drive the vehicle.
•
For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn To On” will flash in the EVIC until you insert the
Key Fob into the ignition switch. Once inserted, the
message “Turn To On” will flash in the EVIC until you
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
•
“Remote Start Active — Key To Run” will display in
the EVIC until you insert and turn the key to ON/
RUN position. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” for further information.
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped
When remote start is activated, the heated steering
wheel, and driver heated seat features will automatically
turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver
vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the
remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.
The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and
deactivated through the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). For more information on Remote Start
Comfort System operation refer to “Electronic Vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features (System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel”.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock
knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.
Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle
without lifting the lock knob.
Doors locked before closing will remain locked when
closed.
The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on
your vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•
Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and re-
move the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, and
do not leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch Location
1 - Unlock 2 - Lock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the Key
Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the
power locks will not operate. This prevents you from
accidentally locking your Key Fob in the vehicle. Remov-
ing the Key Fob or closing the door will allow the locks to
operate. A chime will sound if the Key Fob is in the
ignition switch and a door is open, as a reminder to
remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Auto Unlock Doors — If Equipped
This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when
either front door is opened. This will occur only after the
vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the
vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all
doors closed).
Auto Unlock Doors Programming — If Equipped
The Auto Unlock Doors feature can be enabled or dis-
abled as follows:
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(System Setup)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accor-
dance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle
have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade
screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to
engage and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When
the system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if the
inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location Child Lock Control
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
NOTE:
•
After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,
always test the door from the inside to make certain it
is in the desired position.
•
For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
WINDOWS
Power Windows — If Equipped
Power Window Switches
1 – Left Front 3 – Right Rear
2 – Right Front 4 – Left Rear
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The control on the left front door panel has UP-DOWN
switches that give you fingertip control of all power
windows. There is a single opening and closing switch on
the front passenger door for passenger window control
and on the rear doors of Quad Cab威, Mega Cab威and
Crew Cab models. The windows will operate when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion, and for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned
OFF or until a front door is opened.
NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the
power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Auto-Down
Both the driver and front passenger window switch have
an Auto-Down feature. Press the window switch past the
first detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement, op-
erate the switch in either the up or down direction and
release the switch.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
To open the window part way, press to the first detent
and release it when you want the window to stop.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
(4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door
Only) — If Equipped
Lift the window switch fully upward to the second
detent, release, and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window switch to
the first detent and release when you want the window to
stop.
NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window switch
again to close the window. Any impact due to rough road
conditions may trigger the auto reverse function unex-
pectedly during auto closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly to the first detent and hold to close the
window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Auto-Up Reset
It may be necessary at some point in time to reactivate the
Auto-up/Auto-down feature. To do so, perform the
following steps:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window LOCKOUT Switch — 4–Door Models
The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver’s door
allows you to disable the window control on the rear
passenger doors. To disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors, press the window LOCK button
into the latched or down position. To enable the window
controls, press the window LOCK button again and
return the switch to the released or up position.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down or in partially open positions. This is a
Window Lockout Switch
1 – Window Lockout Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the rear
windows are open and buffeting occurs, open the front
and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•
Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
•
Front seat belts may incorporate pretensioners that
may enhance occupant protection by managing occu-
pant energy during an impact event
•
Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front passen-
ger
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) — if equipped
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if
equipped
•
An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
wheel
•
Knee bolsters/blockers for front seat occupants
•
All seat belt systems (except driver’s and second row
center position) include Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALRs), which lock the seat belt webbing into position
by extending the belt all the way out and then adjust-
ing the belt to the desired length to restrain a child seat
or secure a large item in a seat — if equipped
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, refer to Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren (LATCH).
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
rates of inflation based on the severity and type of
collision.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can
cause severe injury or death to infants in that posi-
tion.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
•
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly
buckled up. You can strike the interior of your
vehicle or other passengers, or you can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Always be sure you and others
in your vehicle are buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions except the Quad Cab威, Mega Cab威
and Crew Cab front center seating position have combi-
nation lap/shoulder belts. The belt webbing retractor is
designed to lock during very sudden stops or accidents.
This feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move
freely with you under normal conditions. However, in a
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of you
striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision best.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas-
sengers safe, too.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm in the rear seat. Grasp the latch
plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Pulling Out Latch Plate And Webbing
Latch Plate To Buckle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING!
•
A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride
too high on your body, possibly causing internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
•
A belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
•
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
•
A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
belt is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in a
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immedi-
ately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.) or if the air bag deployed.
Regular Cab Front Center Three Point Belt
1. The front center seat belt on the Regular Cab may be
disconnected to open up utilization of the storage areas
behind the front seats. The black latch plate can be
detached from the black keyed seat belt buckle located on
the inboard side of the passenger seat. Insert the seat belt
tongue into the center red slot on the black buckle. The
black buckle latch plate can be removed when the seat
belt tongue is pressed into the buckle. Allow the retractor
to take up the extra webbing, and the buckles will hang
vertically from the cab back exit bezel, thus freeing up all
the area behind the front seats.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. To reattach the seat belt to the front center seat, pull
the black buckle latch plate forward from the cab back
panel and insert it into the black keyed buckle until there
is an audible “click”. For proper seat belt usage, refer
“Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions”.
Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING!
•
If the black latch and black buckle are not prop-
erly connected when the seat belt is used by an
occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury
in a collision.
•
When reattaching the black latch and black
buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted. If the webbing is twisted, follow the
preceding procedure to detach the black latch and
black buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach
the black latch and black buckle.
Inserting Latch Plate
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
In Use Position
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front row outboard seats, the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to help position the belt
away from your neck. Squeeze the anchorage button lo-
cated on the upper belt guide to release the anchorage, and
then move it up or down to the position that fits you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Center Lap Belts
The center seating position for the Quad Cab威, Mega
Cab威and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To
fasten the lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a ⬙click.⬙To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the
latch plate and pull. To remove slack, pull the loose end
of the webbing. Wear the lap belt snug against the hips.
Sit back and erect in the seat, then adjust the belt as
tightly as is comfortable.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
A lap belt worn too loose or too high is dangerous.
•
A belt worn too loose can allow you to slip down
and under the belt in a collision.
•
A belt that is too loose or too high will apply crash
forces to the abdomen, not to the stronger hip
bones. In either case, the risk of internal injuries is
greater. Wear a lap belt low and snug.
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Re-
straints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR Cinch ALR
Third Row N/A N/A N/A
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
For Regular Cab Only
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A ALR ALR
Second Row N/A N/A N/A
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfort-
ably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Mode – If
Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-
locked. The belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt.
When To Use The Automatic Locking Mode
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child safety
seat is installed in a seating position that has a belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy
management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on
collision.
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on
the occupant’s chest.
WARNING!
•
The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced
if the seat belt assembly “Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR)” feature or any other seat belt func-
tion is not working properly when checked ac-
cording to the procedures in the Service Manual.
•
Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
could increase the risk of injury in accidents.
Seat Belt Pretensioners — If Equipped
The seat belts for both front seating positions may be
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight around the occupant
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu-
pants, including those in child restraints.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert威warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威will provide both audio and visual
notification.
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威is not active when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威may be
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if
equipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert威can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deac-
tivating BeltAlert威.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use seat belts
throughout their pregnancies. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended, and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the ex-
tender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use the
seat belt extender when the lap belt is not long
enough when it is worn low and snug, and in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the extender when not needed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
NOTE: These air bags are certified to the new Federal
regulations for Advanced Air Bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bags 2 — Knee Bolster
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation based on the severity and type of collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the
driver, front, and rear passengers sitting next to a win-
dow. If the vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, they
are located above the side windows and their covers are
also labeled: SRS AIRBAG.
This vehicle may also be equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. If the
vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bags they are located in the outboard side of the
front seats.
NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•
After any accident, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•
Air Bag Warning Light
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
•
Steering Wheel and Column
•
Instrument Panel
•
Knee Impact Bolster
•
Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
•
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if
equipped
•
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABIC) — if equipped
•
Front and Side Impact Sensors
•
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped).
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel, because any such
objects could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
•
Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
•
Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
•
Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
— If Equipped
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) — If Equipped
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact protection to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in addition to that
provided by the body structure. Each air bag features
inflated chambers placed adjacent to the head of each
outboard occupant that reduce the potential for side-
impact head injuries. The SABIC deploy downward,
covering both windows on the impact side. NOTE:
•
Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Being too close to the SAB and SABIC air bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are cali-
brated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
•
If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC), do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the location of the SABIC.
The area where the SABIC is located should re-
main free from any obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side air bags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
•
If your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags,
do not have any accessory items installed which
will alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to
your vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require
permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for instal-
lation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof
of the vehicle for any reason.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and the front passenger, and position front occu-
pants for the best interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the knee bolsters to provide im-
proved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
air bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
required for this vehicle.
The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
bags — if equipped, SAB air bags — if equipped, and
front seat belt pretensioners — if equipped, as required,
depending on the severity and type of impact.
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
certain frontal collisions depending on the severity and
type of collision. Advanced Front Air Bags are not
expected to reduce the risk of injury in rear, rollover, or
side collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce sub-
stantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole colli-
sions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all acci-
dents, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the LOCK
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approxi-
mately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru-
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos-
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
are possible, based on the collision type and severity. The
steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of
the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as
the air bags inflate to their full size. The air bags fully
inflate in about 50 to 70 milliseconds. This is about half of
the time it takes to blink your eyes. The air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger.
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units — If Equipped
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are de-
signed to activate only in certain side collisions.
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
collision.
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units — If Equipped
During collisions where the impact is confined to a
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time,
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
events.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if
the communication network remains intact, and the
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
event the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform the follow-
ing functions:
•
Cut off fuel to the engine.
•
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition key is turned off.
•
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
•
Unlock the doors automatically.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac-
tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer im-
mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller (ORC) system serviced as well.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure,
or add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or
may not function properly if modifications are
made. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer
for any air bag system service. If your seat, includ-
ing your trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts),
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only
manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact your autho-
rized dealer.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
•
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
•
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
•
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or under should ride properly buckled
up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics,
children are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a projectile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap can
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the right seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward-
facing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearward-
facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward-
facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat. Both types of child restraints are
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchor system. Refer to “Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must never be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger air
bag unless the air bag is turned off. An air bag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system. Refer to “Lower An-
chors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)”.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Cana-
dian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s web-
site for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/safedrivers/childsafety/index.htm
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat.
•
A rearward-facing infant restraint in the front seat
may be struck by a deploying a passenger air bag
which may cause severe or fatal injury to the
infant.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
•
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
•
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Here are some tips for getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. Chrysler Group LLC also recommends that
you make sure that you can install the child restraint in
the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it.
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
•
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle-end belt
several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into
the buckle with the release button facing out.
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
•
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
WARNING!
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a
sudden stop or accident, it could strike the occu-
pants or seatbacks and cause serious personal
injury.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Each vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt, instead securing the child
restraint using lower anchorages and upper tether straps
from the child restraint to the vehicle structure. LATCH
child restraint anchorage systems are installed in the
Quad Cab威, Mega Cab威and Crew Cab rear seat outboard
positions. LATCH equipped seating positions feature
both lower anchor bars, located at the back of the seat
cushion, and tether strap anchorages, located behind the
seat back (refer to “Child Restraint Tether Anchor”).
Quad Cab威/Mega Cab威/Crew Cab
Rear Outboard Seats Driver Side
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the seat back tether anchorage have been available for
some time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers
will provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their
older products.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE:
•
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
•
If your child restraint seat is not LATCH-compatible,
install the restraint using the vehicle seat belting.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Installing The Child Restraint System
WARNING!
Do not install child restraint systems equipped with
LATCH mechanisms in the center position of a Quad
Cab威rear seat, or Crew Cab model with a bench rear
seat. A child may be placed in the rear center seating
position of a Quad Cab威, or Crew Cab bench model
using the seat belt and child tether anchorage. The
LATCH anchorages in the rear seat are designed for
the two outboard seating positions for Quad Cab威,
Crew Cab威with a full bench rear seat, and all three
positions for Mega Cab威, Quad Cab威and Crew Cab威
with a split bench rear seat. Failure to follow this
may result in serious or fatal injury.
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector, and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap, a hook and means for adjusting the
tension in the strap.
In general, you will first loosen the child seat adjusters on
the lower straps and tether straps so that you can more
easily attach the hook or connector to the lower anchor-
ages and tether anchorages. Then tighten all three straps
as you push the child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing The Child Restraint Using The Vehicle
Seat Belts
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either an Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both types of seat
belts are designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary
to use a locking clip. The ALR will make a ratcheting
noise if you extract the entire belt from the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. For
additional information on ALR, refer to “Automatic
Locking Mode”.
The chart below defines the seating positions with an
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch
plate.
Driver Center Passenger
CRS Lock CRS Lock CRS Lock
First Row N/A N/A ALR
Second Row ALR Cinch ALR
Third Row ALR N/A ALR
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
For Regular Cab Only
Driver Center Passenger
First Row N/A ALR ALR
Second Row N/A N/A N/A
•
N/A — Not Applicable
•
ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Installing a Child Restraint with an ALR:
1. To install a child restraint with ALR, first, pull enough
of the seat belt webbing from the retractor to route it
through the belt path of the child restraint. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.” Next,
extract all the seat belt webbing out of the retractor and
then allow the belt to retract into the retractor. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a ratcheting sound. This indicates
the safety belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
Installing a Child Restraint with a Cinching Latch Plate:
1. To install a child restraint with a cinching latch plate,
first, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
retractor to route it through the belt path of the child
restraint. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
2. Finally, pull on any excess webbing to tighten the lap
portion around the child restraint. Any seat belt system
will loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally, and
pull it tight if necessary.
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
•
Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,
preferably between the head restraint posts under-
neath the head restraint.
Child Restraint Tether Anchor
Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for con-
nection to tether anchors have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for their older products.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Regular Cab models have two tether anchorages, one
each behind the front center and right seats. Quad Cab威,
Mega Cab威and Crew Cab models have three anchor-
ages, one behind each of the rear seats.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
seat failure and injury to the child. In a collision, the
seat could come loose and allow the child to crash
into the inside of the vehicle or other passengers, or
even be thrown from the vehicle. Use only the anchor
positions directly behind the child seat to secure a
child restraint top tether strap. Follow the instruc-
tions below. See your authorized dealer for help if
necessary.
Tether Anchorage Points At The Right And Center
Front Seat (Regular Cab - All Seats)
1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the
tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back under
the head restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the
seat.
2. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to
the square opening in the sheet metal.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Multiple Child Restraint Installation Sequence
(Quad Cab威/Crew Cab/Mega Cab威- Rear Seats)
Mega Cab威
1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint to the tether anchor directly behind the seat.
2. Lift the cover, and attach the hook to the square
opening in the sheet metal.
Regular Cab Tether Strap Mounting
1 — Tether Strap Hook
2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint
3 — Tether Anchor
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Install the child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Quad Cab威/Crew Cab
1. The tether straps loops are located between the rear
glass and the rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located
behind each seating position. You can gain access to the
center seating position tether strap loop by raising the
head restraint and reaching between the rear glass and
rear seat.
Mega Cab威Tether Strap Mounting
Head Restraint Adjustment
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
2. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint, through the outboard tether strap loop, then
route it to the tether strap loop located directly behind
the center rear seat.
3. Pass each tether strap hook under the head restraint
and through the loop of webbing behind the child seat.
4. Route each tether strap to the anchor behind the center
seat, and attach the hooks to the anchor loop.
5. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat and
adjust the tether strap so that it will reach under the head
restraint through the center seat tether strap loop and
anchor to the tether strap loop located behind either
outboard seating positions.
6. Install each child restraint and remove the slack in the
tether strap according to the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
Multiple Child Restraint Quad Cab威/Crew Cab
1 — Anchor Loops
2 — Snap Hook
3 — Tether Strap
4 — Passenger’s Side Rear Child Seat
5 — Rear Center Child Seat
6 — Driver’s Side Rear Child Seat
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision. Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”. NON-DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL
OILS MUST NEVER BE USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered a normal part of the break-in and not inter-
preted as an indication of difficulty.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
WARNING!
•
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
•
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set
the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
•
Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and inter-
fering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•
Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on
top of already installed floor mats. Additional
floor mats and other coverings will reduce the size
of the pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•
Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Al-
ways properly reinstall and secure floor mats that
have been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•
If required, mounting posts must be properly
installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss
of control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Mirrors .............................. 98
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror ................ 98
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . . 98
▫Outside Mirrors ...................... 99
▫Outside Mirrors Folding Feature ......... 100
▫Power Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 101
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ........... 102
▫Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If
Equipped .......................... 102
▫Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . 102
▫“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped .......................... 103
▫Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped ..... 104
䡵Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped .......... 105
▫Operation ......................... 107
▫Phone Call Features .................. 114
▫Uconnect™ Phone Features ............. 117
▫Advanced Phone Connectivity ........... 121
3
▫Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect™ Phone .................... 123
▫General Information .................. 134
䡵Voice Command — If Equipped ........... 134
▫Voice Command System Operation ........ 134
▫Commands ........................ 135
▫Voice Training ...................... 139
䡵Seats .............................. 139
▫Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped ....... 139
▫Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped ..... 141
▫Power Lumbar — If Equipped ........... 143
▫Heated Seats — If Equipped ............ 143
▫Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......... 146
▫Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped ...... 147
▫Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped ..... 148
▫40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . 149
▫Mega Cab威Rear Seat Features ........... 150
▫Head Restraints ..................... 153
䡵Driver Memory Seat — If Equipped ........ 156
▫Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory ................ 156
▫Memory Position Recall ................ 158
▫To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To
Memory ........................... 158
▫Easy Entry/Exit Seat .................. 159
䡵To Open And Close The Hood ............ 160
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵Lights ............................. 162
▫Headlights ......................... 163
▫Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ...... 163
▫Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) ............ 164
▫Headlight Delay ..................... 164
▫Parking Lights And Panel Lights ......... 164
▫Fog Lights — If Equipped .............. 164
▫Interior Lights ...................... 165
▫Cargo Light ........................ 166
▫Lights-On Reminder .................. 167
▫Battery Saver ....................... 167
▫Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped .......................... 167
▫Multifunction Lever .................. 167
䡵Windshield Wipers And Washers .......... 169
▫Windshield Wipers ................... 169
▫Windshield Wiper Operation ............ 169
▫Intermittent Wiper System .............. 170
▫Windshield Washers .................. 170
▫Mist Feature ........................ 171
䡵Tilt Steering Column ................... 171
䡵Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 172
䡵Driver Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped ..... 173
䡵Electronic Speed Control ................ 174
▫To Activate ......................... 175
▫To Set A Desired Speed ................ 176
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
▫To Deactivate ....................... 176
▫To Resume Speed .................... 176
▫To Vary The Speed Setting .............. 176
▫To Accelerate For Passing .............. 177
䡵Parksense威Rear Park Assist — If Equipped . . . 177
▫Parksense威Sensors ................... 178
▫Parksense威Warning Display ............ 178
▫Parksense威Display ................... 179
▫Enabling And Disabling Parksense威....... 182
▫Service The Parksense威Rear Park Assist
System ............................ 183
▫Cleaning The Parksense威System ......... 184
▫Parksense威System Usage Precautions ...... 184
䡵Parkview威Rear Back Up Camera — If
Equipped ............................ 187
▫Turning Parkview威On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio ........... 188
▫Turning Parkview威On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio ........... 189
䡵Overhead Console — If Equipped .......... 189
▫Courtesy/Reading Lights .............. 190
䡵Garage Door Opener — If Equipped ........ 191
▫Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink威........................ 192
▫Programming A Rolling Code ........... 193
▫Programming A Non-Rolling Code ........ 195
▫Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .... 196
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫Using HomeLink威................... 197
▫Security ........................... 198
▫Troubleshooting Tips .................. 198
▫General Information .................. 199
䡵Power Sunroof — If Equipped ............ 200
▫Open Sunroof — Express Mode .......... 201
▫Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 201
▫Closing Sunroof — Express ............. 201
▫Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ........ 201
▫Pinch Protect Feature ................. 201
▫Pinch Protect Override ................ 201
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ............. 202
▫Sunshade Operation .................. 202
▫Wind Buffeting ...................... 202
▫Sunroof Maintenance ................. 202
▫Ignition Off Operation ................. 202
䡵Electrical Power Outlets ................. 203
䡵Cigar Lighter And Ash Receiver —
If Equipped .......................... 207
䡵Power Inverter — If Equipped ............ 208
䡵Cupholders .......................... 209
▫Front Instrument Panel Cupholders —
(40–20–40 Seats) ..................... 209
▫Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Mounted Shifter ..................... 210
▫Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab威.......... 210
▫Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab ........... 211
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
䡵Storage ............................. 211
▫Glove Box Storage ................... 211
▫Door Storage ....................... 213
▫Center Storage Compartment —
If Equipped ........................ 214
▫Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If
Equipped .......................... 216
▫Seatback Storage ..................... 217
▫Storage (Regular Cab) ................. 218
▫Storage And Seats (Crew Cab) ........... 218
▫Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models) ................. 219
䡵Rear Window Features .................. 220
▫Rear Window Defroster ................ 220
▫Power Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped ........................ 221
▫Manual Sliding Rear Window —
If Equipped ........................ 221
䡵Fold Flat Load Floor — If Equipped ........ 221
䡵Rambox威— If Equipped ................ 224
▫Rambox威Integrated Box Side Storage Bins . . 224
▫Rambox威Safety Warning ............... 227
▫Bed Extender — If Equipped ............ 228
▫Bed Rail Tie-Down System .............. 236
䡵Slide-In Campers ...................... 238
▫Camper Applications .................. 238
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵Easy-Off Tailgate ...................... 238
▫Disconnecting The Rear Camera — If
Equipped .......................... 238
▫Removing The Tailgate ................ 239
▫Locking Tailgate ..................... 240
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical adjustment of the mirror. Adjust the mirror to
center on the view through the rear window. The mirror
should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward
the windshield).
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control lever under the mirror to the night position (lever
flipped toward the rear of vehicle).
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight
overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in a passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Some vehicles will not have a convex right side
mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manu-
ally folded both forward and rearward to prevent dam-
age.
CAUTION!
It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full
rearward position to resist damage when entering a
car wash or a narrow location.
Folding Mirror
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The controls for the power mirrors are located on the
driver’s door trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch.
To adjust a mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right)
button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.
NOTE: A light in the select button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Power Mirror Controls
Power Mirror Controls
1 — Mirror Select Buttons
2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
Driver’s Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for
glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled
by the inside automatic dimming mirror and can be
turned on or off by pressing the button at the base of the
inside mirror. The mirror will automatically adjust for
headlight glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor.
To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing
the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on auto-
matically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Power Mirror Movement
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-
tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the
sun.
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor
downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the
“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired
position.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Slide-On-Rod Extender
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror
head to provide a greater vision range when towing
extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-
board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or
out).
NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to
entering an automated car wash.
A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror
and can be adjusted separately.
Trailer Towing Position
Blindspot Mirror
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect™ Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect™ Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ
“Mike” ѧ“Work” or “Dial” ѧ“248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect™ Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威“Hands-Free Profile”, Ver-
sion 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect™ website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect™ customer support, visit the following
websites:
•
www.chrysler.com/uconnect
•
www.dodge.com/uconnect
•
www.jeep.com/uconnect
•
or call 1–877–855–8400
Uconnect™ Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
The Uconnect™ Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth威“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect™ features Bluetooth威technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect™ Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect™ Phone. The Uconnect™ Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws and
phone use. All attention should be kept on the
roadway ahead. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect™ Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
(Uconnect™ Phone button and Voice Com-
mand button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect™ followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
Actual button location may vary with the ra-
dio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The Uconnect™ Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威mobile phone. See the
Uconnect™ website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect™ Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect™ Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect™ Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
certain radios.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect™
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect™ Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect™ Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•
Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or an-
other prompt.
•
For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威Device”.
•
For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice
command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break
the compound form command into two voice com-
mands: “Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please re-
member, the Uconnect™ Phone works best when you
talk in a normal conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect™ Phone will play some of the
options at any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the Uconnect™ Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect™ Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect™ Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect™ Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect™ website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
The following are general phone to Uconnect™ Phone
pairing instructions:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
•
When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identi-
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
•
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect™ Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•
You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
phones to your Uconnect™ Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
connected to your Uconnect™ System. The priority
allows the Uconnect™ Phone to know which mobile
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect™ Phone will use the priority three mobile
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
Dial By Saying A Number
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•
For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call”.
•
The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previ-
ously stored name entry in the Uconnect™ phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect™ Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
•
The Uconnect™ system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Add Names To Your Uconnect™ Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect™ Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recom-
mended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.
•
When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
•
When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect™ Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect™ Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect™ Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect™
website for supported phones.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
To call a name from the Uconnect™ Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in
“Call by Saying a Name” section.
•
Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect™ Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•
A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
•
Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book.
•
This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect™ Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect™ Phone on the next
phone connection.
Edit Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
•
Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
•
Press the button to begin.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
•
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
•
When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
Entry” feature.
Delete Uconnect™ Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete”.
•
After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
from the list, press the button while the
Uconnect™ Phone is playing the desired entry and say
“Delete”.
•
After you enter the name, the Uconnect™ Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•
Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect™ Phonebook Entries
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Erase All”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
•
Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
•
Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names In The Uconnect™ Phonebook
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phone-
book entries, if available.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
•
To call one of the names in the list, press the
button during the playing of the desired name, and
say “Call”.
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
•
The selected number will be dialed.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect™ Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect™ Phone. Check with
your mobile service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect™ Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the button until you hear a single
beep, indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Press the button to place the current
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect™ Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Conference Call” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the button until you hear a single beep, indicat-
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the button until you hear a
double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
press and hold the button until you hear a double
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call
on hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect™ Phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect™ Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the Uconnect™ Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
•
After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect™ Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect™ Phone to the mobile phone.
•
An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect™ Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect™ Phone is
using:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
•
Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect™ Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•
Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect™ Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect™ Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency num-
ber. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
area.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect™ Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
•
turned on,
•
paired to the Uconnect™ System,
•
and have network coverage.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Towing Assistance”.
NOTE:
•
The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-
2069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-
3454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico). Please refer to the 24-Hour
“Towing Assistance” coverage details on the DVD in
the Warranty Information Booklet and the 24-Hour
Towing Assistance references.
•
If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the button and say
“Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect™ Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems”.
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect™ Phone to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some ser-
vices require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the
Uconnect™ Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect™ Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, followed
by the word “Send”. For example, if required to enter
your PIN followed with a pound, (3746#),youcan
press the button and say, “3746#Send”. Saying
a number, or sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”,
is also to be used for navigating through an automated
customer service center menu structure, and to leave a
number on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect™ phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the button and say, “Send.” The
system will prompt you to enter the name or number and
say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
The Uconnect™ Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•
You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•
Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could press the button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect™
Phone will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
−
“Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect™ Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect™ Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect™ Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect™ Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect™ Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect™ Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute”.
In order to un-mute the Uconnect™ Phone:
•
Press the button.
•
Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect™ Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect™ Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
from your Uconnect™ Phone paired mobile phone to the
Uconnect™ Phone or vice versa, press the button
and say “Transfer Call”.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect™ Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect™ Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
When prompted, say “List Phones”.
•
The Uconnect™ Phone will play the phone names of
all paired mobile phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the button and
say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sec-
tions for an alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a
paired phone.
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
you wish to select.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect™ Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect™ Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•
Press the button to begin.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
•
At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
•
You can also press the button at any time while the
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect™
Phone
Uconnect™ Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
button and say “Uconnect™ Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect™
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following proce-
dures:
From outside the Uconnect™ Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode):
•
Press and hold the button for five seconds until
the session begins, or,
•
Press the button and say the “Voice Training,
System Training, or Start Voice Training” command.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
You can either press the Uconnect™ Phone button to
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect™ Phone. For
best results, the Voice Training session should be com-
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
•
press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
Voice Command
•
For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least
1
⁄
2
in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
•
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•
Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
•
Performance is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather condition.
•
Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish ac-
cents, the system may not always work for some.
•
When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
•
Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
•
It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the Uconnect™ Phonebook.
•
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect™ Phone Lo-
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
•
Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
•
You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
•
Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
•
Audio quality is maximized under:
•
low-to-medium blower setting,
•
low-to-medium vehicle speed,
•
low road noise,
•
smooth road surface,
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
•
fully closed windows,
•
dry weather conditions, and
•
operation from the driver’s seat.
•
Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect™ Phone.
•
Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
•
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Recent Calls
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Down-
load”, Uconnect™ Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom-
ing and Missed Calls.
SMS
Uconnect™ Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect™ Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
If you wish to hear the new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
•
Uconnect™ Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect™ Phone.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect™ Phone. To send
a new message:
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
•
You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, press the button while the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
Uconnect™ Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming mes-
sages.
•
Press the button.
•
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth威Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect™ Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least fifteen seconds prior to using the
system.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate(s)
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect™ Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice com-
mands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following local laws. All
attention should be kept on the roadway ahead.
Failure to do so may result in a collision causing
serious injury or death.
When you press the Voice Command button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE:
If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of options.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the Voice Command button, listen
for the beep, and say your command.
Pressing the Voice Command button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com-
mand button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Command
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for
Voice Command is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the main
menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•
“Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
•
“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•
“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•
“Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•
“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•
“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•
“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•
“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•
“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•
“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•
“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•
“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•
“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•
“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•
“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•
“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•
“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
−
“Save” (to save the memo)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
−
“Continue” (to continue recording)
−
“Delete” (to delete the recording)
•
“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the Voice
Command button to stop playing memos. You
proceed by saying one of the following commands:
−
“Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
−
“Next” (to play the next memo)
−
“Previous” (to play the previous memo)
−
“Delete” (to delete a memo)
•
“Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say on of the
following:
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Switch to system setup”
•
“Change to setup”
•
“Main menu setup” or
•
“Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
•
“Language English”
•
“Language French”
•
“Language Spanish”
•
“Tutorial”
•
“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
Command button first and wait for the beep before
speaking the “Barge In” commands.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect™
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Press the Voice Command button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect™ Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power
driver’s seat. The power seat switches are located on the
outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. There are two
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
power seat switches that are used to control the move-
ment of the seat cushion and the seatback.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
Power Seat Switches
1 — Power Seat Switch
2 — Power Seatback Switch
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining The Seatback
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or
rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,
the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when you have reached the desired position.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped
Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas-
senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the
outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control
the movement of the seat and seat cushion.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when you have reached the desired position.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when you have reached the desired position.
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the front of
the seat switch, the front of the seat cushion will move in
the direction of the switch. Release the switch when you
have reached the desired position.
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
•
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt, which could result in serious injury or death.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power
lumbar switch is located on the outboard side of the
power seat. Push the switch forward to increase the
lumbar support. Push the switch rearward to decrease
the lumbar support.
Heated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, the front and rear seats may be
equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions and
seatbacks.
Lumbar Control Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a
seat that has been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface temperature of
the seat.
Front Heated Seats
There are two heated seat switches that allow the driver
and passenger to operate the seats independently. The
controls for each seat are located near the bottom center
of the instrument panel (below the climate controls).
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-
level heating. Press the switch a sec-
ond time to select LOW-level heating.
Press the switch a third time to shut
the heating elements OFF.
NOTE:
•
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
•
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The heated seats switch from HIGH to LOW and from
LOW to OFF automatically, based on time and tempera-
ture of the seat. The heated seats can operate on HIGH
heat for a maximum of 60 minutes before switching to
LOW heat. Once a seat has switched to the LOW heat
setting it may operate for a maximum of 45 minutes
before automatically shutting OFF. The heated seats can
shut OFF early or may not turn on when the seat is
already warm.
Vehicle Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
driver’s heated seat can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Rear Heated Seats
On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped
with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these
seats are located on the rear of the center console.
There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear
passengers to operate the seats independently. You can
choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings. Amber
indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in
use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for HIGH, one
for LOW and none for OFF.
Press the switch once to select HIGH-
level heating. Press the switch a sec-
ond time to select LOW-level heating.
Press the switch a third time to shut
the heating elements OFF.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
NOTE:
•
Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within
two to five minutes.
•
The engine must be running for the heated seats to
operate.
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes
of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the
normal HIGH-level. If the HIGH-level setting is selected,
the system will automatically switch to LOW-level after a
maximum of 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that
time, the number of illuminated LEDs changes from two
to one, indicating the change. The LOW-level setting will
turn OFF automatically after a maximum of 45 minutes.
Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
On some models, both the driver and passenger seats are
ventilated. Located in the seat cushion and seatback are
small fans that draw the air from the passenger compart-
ment and blow air through fine perforations in the seat
cover to help keep the driver and front passenger cooler
in higher ambient temperatures.
The ventilated seat switches are located in the switch
bank in the center stack of the instrument panel, just
below the climate controls. The fans operate at two
speeds, HIGH and LOW.
Press the switch once to choose HIGH,
press it a second time to choose LOW.
Pressing the switch a third time will
turn the ventilated seat OFF. When
HIGH speed is selected both lights on
the switch will be illuminated. When
LOW speed is selected one light will
be illuminated.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models equipped with remote start, the drivers
ventilated seat can be programmed to come on during a
remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System — If
Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped
Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The
manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat
cushion at the front edge of each seat.
While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide
the seat forward or backward. Release the bar once you
have reached the desired position. Then, using body
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Adjuster
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
WARNING!
•
Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•
Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Reclining Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is used to adjust the seatback position
and is located on the outside of the seat cushion.
Recline Handle
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the handle, lean
back on the seatback and when you reach the desired
position, release the handle. To return the seatback, lift
upward on the handle, lean forward and release the
handle at the desired position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Dump Feature — Manual Recline Seat Only
Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to
swing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This
“dump” feature allows access to the storage bin behind
the seat.
WARNING!
•
Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while
actuating the handle. The seatback may swing
forward and hit you causing injury.
•
To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback
and actuate the handle, then position the seatback
in the desired position.
40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped
The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard
seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat.
On some models the back of the center portion (20%)
easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage
compartment.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Mega Cab姞Rear Seat Features
Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped
The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat
cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the
handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach
the desired position, release the handle.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Folding Rear Seat (Table Mode) — If Equipped
Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down
and used as a table.
To fold down either rear seatback:
1. Lift the handle, located next to the head restraint.
Rear Seat Recliner Handle
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Fold the seatback forward. 3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seatback is locked in place.
Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped
Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward
when the seatback is folded flat.
Table Mode Handle Table Mode
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
•
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•
Cargo must be securely tied down before driving
your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly
around in a sudden stop or collision and strike
someone in the vehicle, causing serious injury or
death.
To fold either rear seat flat:
1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of either
of the rear seats.
2. Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward.
Handle
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright
position. Be sure the seat is locked in place.
WARNING!
An improperly latched seat could cause serious in-
jury or death. Make sure that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback in not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Rear Passenger Fold Flat Seats
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occu-
pying a seat. Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the adjust-
ment button, located on the base of the head restraint,
and push downward on the head restraint.
Adjustment Button
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraints
The two outboard seat are equipped with adjustable head
restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the
adjustment button, located on the base of the head
restraint, and push downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
•
The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad
Cab) has only one adjustment position that is used to
aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
•
The head restraints should only be removed by quali-
fied technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
Adjustment Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED
The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard
side of the drivers seat cushion.
The memory buttons 1 and 2 can be programmed to
recall the driver’s seat position, driver’s outside mirror
position, adjustable brake, accelerator pedals position
and radio station preset settings. Your Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitters can also be programmed to
recall the same positions when the UNLOCK button is
pressed.
NOTE: The power lumbar option is not programmable
with driver memory seats.
Your vehicle was delivered with two RKE transmitters.
One or both RKE transmitters can be linked to either
memory position. The memory system can accommodate
up to two RKE transmitters, each RKE transmitter linked
to either of the two memory positions.
Setting Memory Positions And Linking RKE
Transmitter To Memory
NOTE: Each time the S (SET) button and a numbered
button 1 or 2 are pressed, you erase the memory settings
for that button and store a new one.
Memory Seat Buttons
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
1. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position.
2. Press the driver door MEMORY button number 1 if
you are setting the memory for driver 1, or button
number 2 if you are setting the memory for driver 2. The
system will recall any stored settings. Wait for the system
to complete the memory recall before continuing to
Step 3.
3. Adjust the driver’s seat, recliner, and driver’s
sideview mirror to the desired positions.
4. Adjust the power adjustable pedals (if equipped) to
the desired positions.
5. Turn on the radio and set the radio station presets (up
to 12 AM and 12 FM stations can be set).
6. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and
remove the key.
7. Press and release the S (SET) button located on the
driver’s door.
8. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 or 2 on the driver’s door. The next step must be
performed within five seconds if you desire to also use a
RKE transmitter to recall memory positions.
9. Press and release the LOCK button on one of the RKE
transmitters.
10. Insert the ignition key, and turn the ignition switch to
the ON position.
11. Select “Remote Linked to Memory” in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and enter “Yes”. Refer
to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
12. Repeat the above steps to set the next memory
position, using the other numbered memory button, or to
link another RKE transmitter to memory.
Memory Position Recall
NOTE: The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not
in PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
To recall the memory settings for driver one, press
MEMORY button number 1 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 1.
To recall the memory setting for driver two, press
MEMORY button number 2 on the driver’s door, or the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter linked to
memory position 2.
A recall can be cancelled by pressing any of the
MEMORY buttons on the drivers seat during a recall (S,
1, or 2). When a recall is cancelled, the driver’s seat,
driver’s mirror and the pedals stop moving. A delay of
one second will occur before another recall can be
selected.
To Disable A RKE Transmitter Linked To Memory
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, and
remove the key.
2. Press and release MEMORY button number 1. The
system will recall any memory settings stored in position
1. Wait for the system to complete the memory recall
before continuing to Step 3.
3. Press and release the memory S (SET) button located
on the driver’s door.
4. Within five seconds, press and release MEMORY
button 1 on the driver’s door.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. Within five seconds, press and release the UNLOCK
button on the RKE transmitter. To disable another RKE
transmitter linked to either memory position, repeat
steps 1 through 5 for each RKE transmitter.
NOTE: Once programmed, all RKE transmitters linked
to memory can be easily enabled or disabled at one time.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Easy Entry/Exit Seat
This feature provides automatic driver’s seat positioning
which will enhance driver mobility out of and into the
vehicle.
There are two possible Easy Entry/Exit adjustments
available:
•
The seat cushion will move rearward approximately
2.5 in (60 mm), if the starting position of the seat is
greater than or equal to 2.67 in (68 mm) forward of the
rear seat stop when the key is removed from the
ignition switch. The seat will then move forward
approximately 2.5 in (60 mm) when the key is placed
into the ignition and turned out of the LOCK position.
•
The seat will move to the position located 0.3 in
(8 mm) forward of the rear stop if the starting position
is between 0.9 to 2.67 in (23 to 68 mm) forward of the
rear stop when the key is removed from the ignition
switch. The seat will move forward to the memory/
driving position when the key is placed into the
ignition, and turned out of the LOCK position toward
the ACC/ON position.
The Easy Entry/Exit feature will be automatically dis-
abled if the seat is already positioned closer than 0.9 in
(23 mm) forward of the rear stop. At this position, there
is no benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy
Exit/Entry.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy
Entry/Exit position.
NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled
when the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy
Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through
the programmable features in the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Customer-Programmable
Features” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering
wheel at the base of the instrument panel.
Hood Release
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood
and push the safety latch lever from right to left to release
it, before raising the hood.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center
of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
Safety Latch (1500 Series Shown)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
LIGHTS
The headlight switch is located on the left side of the
instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-
light switch controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and
fog lights (if equipped).
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog
light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as
scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens
cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,
steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the
lenses.
Headlight Switch Location
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight
switch clockwise to the headlight position.
When the headlight switch is on, the parking
lights, taillights, license plate light and instru-
ment panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the
headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)
position.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.
When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is
also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF
position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the
headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
Automatic Headlight Position
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-
lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.
Headlights On With Wipers
(Available With Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Delay
To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when
the ignition is turned OFF while the headlight switch is
on, and then the headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight
delay can be cancelled by either turning the headlight
switch on then off, or by turning the ignition ON.
The headlight delay time is programmable on vehicles
equipped with an Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Customer-Programmable Features (SETUP)” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Parking Lights And Panel Lights
To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel
lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
parking light symbol. To turn off the parking lights,
rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off) position.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight
switch to the parking light or headlight position and
pushing in the headlight rotary control.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights
are on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam.
An indicator light located in the instrument cluster will
illuminate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will
turn off when the switch is pushed a second time, when
the headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or the
high beam is selected.
Interior Lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front
doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating
wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far
right detent position, or if equipped, when the UNLOCK
button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. When a door is open and the interior lights
are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left, to the
OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights to go out.
This is also known as the ⬙Party⬙mode because it allows
the doors to stay open for extended periods of time
without discharging the vehicle’s battery.
The brightness of the instrument panel lighting can be
regulated by rotating the dimmer control right (brighter)
or left (dimmer). When the headlights are on you can
supplement the brightness of the odometer, trip odom-
eter, radio and overhead console by rotating the control
Fog Light Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
to the right until you hear a click. This feature is termed
the “Parade” mode and is useful when headlights are
required during the day.
Cargo Light
The cargo lights are turned on by pressing on the cargo
button.
The cargo lights will also turn on for approximately
30 seconds when a RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is
pressed, as part of the Illuminated Entry feature.
Dimmer Control Cargo Light Switch
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on
after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when
the driver’s door is opened.
Battery Saver
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding
is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.
If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for
10 minutes or the dimmer control is rotated right for
10 minutes, the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled
OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after
eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on
for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior
lights will automatically turn off.
NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is
ON.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the
engine is started and the transmission is in any gear
except PARK. This provides a constant ⬙Lights ON⬙
condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights
illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the
parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) will turn OFF. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the
DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for
the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn
signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-
ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to
turn on until the lever is released.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the
multifunction back toward the steering wheel will turn
the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.
Turn Signal Lever
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wipers
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the
multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select
the desired wiper speed.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past
the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
High/Low Beam Switch Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Intermittent Wiper System
The intermittent feature of this system was designed for
use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,
with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For
maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob
into the upper end of the delay range.
The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until
it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can
be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay
intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed
is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Windshield Washers
To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the
wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer
knob is released from this position. If the washer knob is
depressed while in the delay range, the wiper will operate
for several seconds after the washer knob is released. It
will then resume the intermittent interval previously
selected. If the washer knob is pushed while in the off
position, the wiper will turn on and cycle approximately
three times after the wash knob is released.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,
located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to
the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one
time and automatically shut off.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the
steering column, below the multifunction lever.
Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the
steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering
wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.
Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in
place.
Tilt Steering Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Be sure the
steering column is locked before driving your ve-
hicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for
approximately 58 to 70 minutes before automatically
shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early
or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already
warm.
The heated steering wheel switch is located on the switch
bank below the climate controls.
Press the switch to turn on the heated
steering wheel. The light on the switch
will illuminate to indicate the steering
wheel heater is on. Pressing the switch
a second time will turn off the heated
steering wheel and light indicator.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start. Refer to “Remote Starting System
— If Equipped” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, ex-
haustion, or other physical conditions must exer-
cise care when using the steering wheel heater. It
may cause burns even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods.
•
Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material.. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,
and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away
from the driver to provide improved position with the
steering wheel.
The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of
the steering column.
•
The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
Adjustable Pedals Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
•
The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in
REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-
tem is on. The following messages will be displayed
on vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle In-
formation System (EVIC) if the pedals are attempted to
be adjusted when the system is locked out (“Adjust-
able Pedal Disabled — Cruise Control Engaged” or
“Adjustable Pedal Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-
ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
1 — ON/OFF 2 — RES +
4 — CANCEL 3 — SET -
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
PARKSENSE姞REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense威Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to ParkSense威System
Usage Precautions for limitations of this system and
recommendations.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
ParkSense威will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense威can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense威is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
10 mph (16 km/h).
ParkSense姞Sensors
The four ParkSense威sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense姞Warning Display
The ParkSense威Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Customer- Pro-
grammable Features section of the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense威Warning Display is located in the Instru-
ment cluster’s EVIC display. It provides both visual and
audible warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense姞Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
ParkSense威Warning Display
Park Assist System On
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
three solid arcs and will produce a one-half second tone.
As the vehicle moves closer to the object the EVIC
display will show fewer arcs and the sound tone will
change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
Park Assist System Off Slow Tone
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the EVIC display
shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.
The following chart shows the warning alert operation
when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(in/cm)
Greater than
79 in (200 cm)
79-39 in
(200-100 cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30 cm)
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2
Second Tone
Slow Fast Continuous
Display Message Park Assist
System ON
Warning Object
Detected
Warning Object
Detected
Warning Object
Detected
Warning Object
Detected
Arcs None 3 Solid
(Continuous)
3 Slow
Flashing
2 Slow
Flashing
1 Slow
Flashing
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes
NOTE: ParkSense威will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense姞
ParkSense威can be enabled and disabled with a switch
located in the switch bank of the instrument panel or
through the Customer-Programmable Features section of
the EVIC. The available choices are: OFF, Sound Only, or
Sound and Display. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the ParkSense威switch is pressed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster will
display the “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” mes-
sage for approximately five seconds. Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the EVIC will display the “PARK
ASSIST SYSTEM OFF” message for as long as the vehicle
is in REVERSE.
The ParkSense威switch LED will be ON when
ParkSense威is disabled or defective. The ParkSense威
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled.
Service The ParkSense姞Rear Park Assist System
When the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist System is mal-
functioning, the instrument cluster will actuate a single
chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information. When
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the system has
detected a faulted condition, the EVIC will display the
“CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” or the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense威
will not operate.
If “CLEAN PARK ASSIST SENSORS” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) make sure
the rear fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice,
mud, dirt or other obstruction, and then cycle the igni-
tion. If the message continues to appear, see an autho-
rized dealer.
If “SERVICE PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” appears in the
EVIC, see your authorized dealer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Cleaning The ParkSense姞System
Clean the ParkSense威sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense姞System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense威system operat-
ing properly.
•
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense威.
•
When you turn ParkSense威off, the instrument cluster
will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF.” Further-
more, once you turn ParkSense威off, it remains off
until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the ignition
key.
•
When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense威is turned off, the instrument
cluster will display “PARK ASSIST SYSTEM OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
•
ParkSense威, when on, will reduce the volume of the
radio when it is sounding a tone.
•
Clean the ParkSense威sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense威system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc.,
must not be placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper while driving the vehicle. Failure to do
so can result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the “SERVICE
PARK ASSIST SYSTEM” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster.
•
On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense威
should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered
or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A
lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that
an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
ParkSense威is only a parking aid and it is unable
to recognize every obstacle, including small ob-
stacles. Parking curbs might be temporarily de-
tected or not detected at all. Obstacles located
above or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
•
The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense威in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense威.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
WARNING!
•
Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist Sys-
tem. Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for pedes-
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for safety and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Before using the ParkSense威Rear Park Assist
System, it is strongly recommended that the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury or
damage to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch
ball will be much closer to the obstacle than the
rear fascia when the warning display turns on the
single flashing arc and sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball mount
and hitch ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an obstacle is
behind the vehicle.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
PARKVIEW姞REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView威Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio display
screen along with a caution note to “check entire sur-
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five sec-
onds this note will disappear. The ParkView威camera is
located to the left of the tailgate handle.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the navigation or audio screen
appears again.
When displayed, static grid lines will illustrate the width
of the vehicle while a dashed center-line will indicate the
center of the vehicle to assist with aligning to a hitch/
receiver. The static grid lines will show separate zones
that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the
vehicle. The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
Zones Distance to the rear of
the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView威Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView威should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView威camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView威to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView威.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with
water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Turning ParkView姞On Or Off — With
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Press the “camera setup” soft-key.
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft key and pressing the
“save” soft-key.
5. Press the “save” soft key.
Turning ParkView姞On Or Off — Without
Navigation/Multimedia Radio
1. Press the “menu” hard-key.
2. Select “system setup” soft-key.
3. Enable or disable the rear camera feature by selecting
“enable rear camera in reverse” soft-key.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
The overhead console is located on the headliner above
the review mirror. The overhead console contains the
following features:
•
Courtesy/Reading Lights
•
Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped
•
Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped
•
Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Courtesy/Reading Lights
Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger
compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a
door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the
courtesy light position (full right position), or when the
UNLOCK button is pressed on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, if equipped. These lights are also
operated individually as reading lights by pressing on
the corresponding lens.
Front Courtesy/Reading Lights
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
m
NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until
the switch is pressed a second time, so be sure they have
been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior
lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will
extinguish after 15 minutes.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-
ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
The HomeLink威buttons that are located in the overhead
console designate the three different HomeLink威chan-
nels.
NOTE: HomeLink威is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display “CLEAR-
ING CHANNELS”. Release the buttons when the EVIC
displays “CHANNELS CLEARED”.
HomeLink威Buttons
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink威for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
•
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink威button you wish to
program.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit-
ter button.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN-
NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
NOTE:
•
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased
for the channel to train.
•
If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
Step 2.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button.
On some garage door openers/devices there may be a
light that blinks when the garage door opener/device is
in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). The EVIC will display “CHANNEL #
TRANSMIT”. If the garage door opener/device activates,
programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not
activate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button until
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink威button you wish to
program.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button you want to program and the hand-held transmit-
ter button.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN-
NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
NOTE:
•
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased
for the channel to train.
•
If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
Step 2.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威button.
The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”. If the
garage door opener/device activates, programming is
complete.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button until
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remain-
ing steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to
8 cm) away from the HomeLink威button you wish to
program.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the Homelink威
button while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-
held transmitter every two seconds.
4. Continue to hold buttons until the EVIC display
changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHAN-
NEL # TRAINED”, then release both buttons.
NOTE:
•
It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cased
for the channel to train.
•
If the EVIC displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat from
Step 2.
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威button.
The EVIC will display “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT”. If the
device is plugged in and activates, programming is
complete.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威button until
the EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, press and release the programmed
HomeLink威button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To erase the channels press and hold the two outside
HomeLink威buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) will display
“CLEARING CHANNELS”. Release the buttons when
the EVIC displays “CHANNELS CLEARED”.
The HomeLink威Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
•
Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
•
Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•
Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This in-
cludes most garage door opener models manufac-
tured after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener
without these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–
355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-
sistance.
•
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-
gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE:
•
The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for com-
pliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•
The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console between the courtesy/reading lights.
WARNING!
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
•
Do not allow small children to operate the sun-
roof. Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Power Sunroof Switch
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Open Sunroof — Express Mode
Press the switch rearward and release it and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Open”. During “Express Open” operation, any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During “Express Close” operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction is detected, the sunroof will automatically re-
tract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press
the switch forward and release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts re-
sult in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt
will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect
disabled.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold for two
seconds after the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof
to move toward the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) is in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The power sunroof switch remain active for up to ap-
proximately 45 seconds after the ignition switch has been
turned OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature.
For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power sunroof
switch will remain active for approximately ten minutes
after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
time is programmable. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-
mation Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-
Programmable Features)” in “Understanding Your In-
strument Panel” for further information.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide
power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the
standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets
have a cap attached to the outlet indicating “12V DC”,
together with either a key symbol or a battery symbol.
A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the
ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide
power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is
connected to the battery, and can provide power at all
times.
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威knob
and element must be used.
CAUTION!
•
Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
•
Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following
locations:
•
Lower left and lower right of the center stack —
without floor mounted shifter.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
•
Inside the top storage tray — with floor mounted
shifter.
•
Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment
— if equipped.
•
Rear of the center console storage compartment —
Quad Cab威or Crew Cab.
Power Outlet — Floor Shifter
Power Outlet — Upper Lid
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply
power when the key is in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tions.
All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be
removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — M7 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Seat (Opt) or
with Console Rear
2 — M6 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel or
with Console Front
3 — M36 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Instrument Panel or
with Console Center
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
•
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF
EQUIPPED
A removable ash receiver and cigar lighter are available.
For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be
used to hold the ash receiver.
For vehicles equipped with an optional floor shifter.
Ash Receiver and Cigar Lighter (Bench Seat)
1 — Cigar Lighter
2 — Ash Receiver
Optional Floor Shifter
1 — Cigar Lighter
2 — Ash Receiver
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the
center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the
radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics
and other low power devices requiring power up to 150
Watts. Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually press the power inverter button OFF and ON.
To avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
The power inverter switch is located
on the switch bank below the Climate
Controls. To turn on the power outlet,
press the switch once. Press the switch
a second time to turn the power outlet
off.
Power Inverter Outlet
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
•
When the power inverter switch is pressed, there will
be a delay of approximately one second before the
power inverter status indicator turns on. The status
indicator of the AC power inverter indicates whether
the inverter is producing AC power.
•
Due to built-in overload protection, the power inverter
will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•
Do not use a three-prong adapter.
•
Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
•
Do not touch with wet hands.
•
Close the lid when not in use.
•
If this outlet is mishandled it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
CUPHOLDERS
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders —
(40–20–40 Seats)
The cupholders are located in the pull-out tray at the
bottom of the center stack. The pull-out tray must be
secured when opened. To secure the tray push down
until it “clicks”.
Front Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor
Mounted Shifter
For vehicles equipped with bucket seats and a floor
mounted shifter there are two cupholders located in the
floor console.
Rear Cupholder — Quad Cab姞
Quad Cab威vehicles may be equipped with a rear cup-
holder that consists of two cup wells for rear passenger
convenience.
Cupholders (Floor Mounted Shifter)
Rear Cup Wells
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Cupholder — Crew Cab
Crew Cab vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders
located in the center armrest.
STORAGE
Glove Box Storage
The glove box is located on the passenger side of the
instrument panel and features both an upper and lower
storage area.
Crew Cab Rear Armrest Cupholder
Glove Box
1 — Upper Glove Box
2 — Lower Glove Box
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
To open the upper glove box push upward on the handle
release. The glove box door will automatically open.
To open the lower glove box, pull on the handle to release
the latch and lower the door.
Upper Glove Box Lower Glove Box
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Door Storage
Front Door Storage — If Equipped
Storage areas and bottle holders (drivers side only) are
located in the door trim panels.
Rear Door Storage — Crew Cab
Storage compartments are located in both the driver and
passenger door trim panels.
Front Door Storage
Rear Door Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The center storage compartment is located between the
driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment
provides an armrest and contains both and upper and
lower storage area.
WARNING!
•
This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the
armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle
operation, or a collision. Only use the center
seating position when the armrest is fully upright.
•
In a collision, the latch may open if the total
weight of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs
(4.5 kg). These items could be thrown about en-
dangering occupants of the vehicle. Items stored
should not exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).
Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to
raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a 12 Volt
power outlet that can be used to power small electrical
devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further
information.
Center Storage Compartment
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to
open the lower storage bin.
Upper Storage Compartment Lower Storage Bin
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distrac-
tion, resulting in death or injury.
Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped
In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second
row seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage
bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for
cleaning. To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of
the latch and open the lid.
In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to
fully open the lid.
Seatback Storage
Located in the back of both the driver and passenger
front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.
Opened Storage Bin
Drivers Side Seatback Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Storage (Regular Cab)
The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs
the length of the cab.
Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)
The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under
the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage com-
partment.
To open the storage compartments, lift upward on the
handle of the latch and open the lid.
Storage Bin
Crew Cab Storage
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Always lift the storage compartment lids by using
the handle. Failure to lift the lids by using the handle
can result in damage to the lids.
Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers
(Regular Cab Models)
Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag
handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind
the rear seat.
Grocery Bag Hooks
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on the
climate control panel. Press this button to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately
10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation,
press the button a second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•
Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
•
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abra-
sive window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•
Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
The switch for the power sliding rear window is located
on the overhead console.
Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the
switch to the left to close the glass.
Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped
A locking device in the center of the window helps to
prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the
lock to release the window.
FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED
Quad Cab威and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat
may be equipped with a folding load floor.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on
the load floor. While driving or in an accident you
may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,
or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor
may move around with force and strike occupants,
resulting in serious or fatal injury.
Rear Window Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Unfolding the Load Floor
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until
the load floor unfolds into position.
3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.
Unfolding The Load Floor Load Floor In Open Position
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Positioning the Load Floor for Storage Access Under
the Seat
1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.
2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the
load floor.
3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load
floor.
WARNING!
Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.
When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor
could move to the down position causing serious
injury.
4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the
secured down position before you operate the vehicle.
Load Floor Securing Straps
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
RAMBOX姞— IF EQUIPPED
The RamBox威system is an integrated pickup box storage
and cargo management system consisting of three fea-
tures:
•
Integrated box side storage bins
•
Cargo extender/divider
•
Bed rail tie-down system
RamBox姞Integrated Box Side Storage Bins
Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup
box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,
illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) of evenly
distributed cargo.
RamBox威Cargo Storage Bins
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the following items could cause
damage to the vehicle:
•
Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is
properly secured.
•
Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg)
per bin.
To open a storage bin, press and release the button
located on the lid. The RamBox威lid will open upward to
allow hand access. Lift the lid to fully open.
RamBox威Pushbutton And Lock
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
The interior of the RamBox威will automatically illumi-
nate when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic
illumination switch, there is a manual on/off switch
located at the rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch
once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again
will turn the lights back on.
CAUTION!
Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time
could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid
is required to stay open for extended periods of time,
it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off
manually using the on/off switch.
The RamBox威storage bins can be locked using the
vehicle key. To lock the storage bin, insert the key into the
keyhole on the pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock.
CAUTION!
•
Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before
moving or driving vehicle.
(Continued)
RamBox威Light Switch
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be
minimized to prevent damage to the lid and
latching/hinging mechanisms.
•
Damage to the RamBox威bin may occur due to
heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to
vehicle motion. In order to minimize potential for
damage, secure all cargo to prevent movement and
protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp
objects with appropriate padding.
Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow
water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the
edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.
NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo
dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addi-
tion to other RamBox威accessories) are available from
MOPAR威.
RamBox姞Safety Warning
Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal
injury or damage to your vehicle:
WARNING!
•
Always close the storage bin covers when your
vehicle is unattended.
•
Do not allow children to have access to the storage
bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may
not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
•
In an accident, serious injury could result if the
storage bin covers are not properly latched.
•
Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin
covers open.
•
Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched
while the vehicle is in motion.
•
Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
RamBox威Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release
Lever — If Equipped
As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency
Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha-
nism.
NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside
the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from
inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever
attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.
Bed Extender — If Equipped
The bed extender has three functional positions:
•
Storage Position
•
Divider Position
•
Extender Position
Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Position
The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of
the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when
not in use.
To install the bed extender into the storage position,
perform the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully
forward in the bed against the front panel.
3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard
ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down loops.
Storage Position Cargo Tie Down Loop
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure
the panel into place and assist against theft.
Divider Position
The divider position is intended for managing your cargo
and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the
bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels
which allow for various positions to assist in managing
your cargo.
Side Gates Closed
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
To install the bed extender into a divider position per-
form the following:
1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the
vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to
release the extender side gates.
2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the
outboard ends align with the intended slots in the sides
of the bed.
Center Handle And Lock
1 — Center Handle Lock
2 — Handle
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends
are secured into the intended slots of the bed.
4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side
gates in the closed position.
5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place
and assist against theft.
Extender Position
The extender position allows you to load the bed of the
truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an
additional 15 in (38 cm) in the back of the truck when
Aligning Gate To Slots Side Gates Closed
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
additional cargo room is needed. The extender position
utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both
sides of the truck bed near the tailgate.
To install the bed extender into the extender position
perform the following:
1. Lower the tailgate.
2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the
center handle vertically in order to release the extender
side gates.
3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and
handle.
Extender Position
Extender Installation
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure
into place.
WARNING!
To reduce the risk of potential injury or property
damage:
•
Cargo must be secured.
•
Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.
•
Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs.
•
Extender should not be used as cargo tie down.
•
When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg) load on the tailgate.
•
The bed extender is not intended for off road use.
•
When not in use, the extender/divider should be in
stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed.
•
When in use all handles are to be in the locked
position.
Locking Tab
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Bed Rail Tie-Down System
CAUTION!
The maximum load per cleat should not exceed
250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat
should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or
damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.
There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed
that can be used to assist in securing cargo.
Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of
the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo
properly secure.
Adjustable Cleats
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut
counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull
out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the
desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the
detent and tighten the nut.
To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end
cap by pushing up on the locking tab, located on the
bottom of the end cap. Slide the cleat off the end of the
rail.
1 — Utility Rail Detent
2 — Cleat Retainer Nut
3 — Utility Rail Cleat
Utility Rail End Cap
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
SLIDE-IN CAMPERS
Camper Applications
Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in
campers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please
refer to the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Load-
ing” document available from your authorized dealer.
For safety reasons, follow all instructions in this impor-
tant document.
NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a
vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) must be provided.
EASY-OFF TAILGATE
To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,
the tailgate can be removed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera
the electrical connector must be disconnected prior to
removing the tailgate.
Disconnecting the Rear Camera — If Equipped
1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera connector
bracket located on the rear sill.
2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by press-
ing inward in the locking tab.
Connector Bracket
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the
connector bracket does not fall into the sill.
4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the
glove box) to the chassis wiring harness and insert the
bracket back into the sill.
5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove box)
to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the terminals
do not corrode.
6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the
forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will prevent
damaging the connector and bracket when storing or
reinstalling the tailgate.
Removing The Tailgate
1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera (if
equipped), refer to “Disconnecting the Rear Camera — If
Equipped” in this section.
2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by
releasing the lock tang from the pivot.
Locking Tab
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing
support cables.
3. Raise the tailgate to a 45 degree angle.
4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side
pivot clears the hanger bracket.
5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side
pivot.
6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.
NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck
pickup box.
WARNING!
To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly,
the exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap
or Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the
overhanging camper compartment and be free of
leaks.
Locking Tailgate
The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The
tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key.
Locking Tang
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵Instrument Panel Features ............... 245
䡵Switch Bank Button Description ........... 246
▫Upper Switch Bank ................... 246
▫Lower Switch Bank ................... 246
䡵Instrument Cluster — Base ............... 248
䡵Instrument Cluster — Premium ........... 249
䡵Instrument Cluster Descriptions ........... 250
䡵Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) — If Equipped ................... 268
▫EVIC Displays ...................... 269
▫Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode / Distance
To Empty (DTE) — If Equipped .......... 276
▫Trip Functions ...................... 277
▫Vehicle Info
(Customer Information Features) ......... 278
▫TirePSI ........................... 279
▫Units ............................. 279
4
▫Compass / Temperature Display ......... 280
▫Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup) ...................... 282
䡵Media Center 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/
RBZ/RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — If
Equipped ............................ 288
▫Operating Instructions (Voice Command
System) — If Equipped ................ 289
▫Operating Instructions
(Uconnect™ Phone) — If Equipped ....... 289
䡵Media Center 130 (Sales Code RES) ......... 289
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 289
▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 292
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 294
▫Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode .... 297
䡵Media Center 130 With Satellite Radio
(Sales Code RES+RSC)................... 298
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode ..... 298
▫Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play ................. 304
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files ............ 306
▫List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 308
▫Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) ...... 308
▫Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped .......................... 309
▫Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone)
— If Equipped ...................... 313
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
䡵iPod威/USB/MP3 Control — If Equipped ..... 313
▫Connecting The iPod威Or External USB
Device ............................ 314
▫Using This Feature ................... 315
▫Controlling The iPod威Or External USB
Device Using Radio Buttons ............. 315
▫Play Mode ......................... 316
▫List Or Browse Mode ................. 317
▫Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) ........ 319
䡵Uconnect™ Multimedia Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ — If Equipped ............ 320
▫Getting Started ...................... 320
▫Single Video Screen ................... 321
▫Play Video Games .................... 324
▫Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2
While A Video Is Playing On Channel 1 .... 327
▫Important Notes For Single Video Screen
System ............................ 329
▫Play A DVD Using The
Touch-Screen Radio ................... 329
▫Remote Control ..................... 332
▫Remote Control Storage ................ 334
▫Locking The Remote Control ............ 335
▫Replacing The Batteries ................ 335
▫Headphones Operation ................ 336
▫Controls ........................... 337
▫Replacing The Batteries ................ 338
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
▫Unwired威Stereo Headphone Lifetime
Limited Warranty .................... 338
▫System Information ................... 339
䡵Steering Wheel Audio
Controls — If Equipped.................. 353
▫Radio Operation ..................... 354
▫CD Player ......................... 354
䡵CD/DVD Disc Maintenance .............. 354
䡵Radio Operation And Mobile Phones ....... 355
䡵Climate Controls ...................... 355
▫Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System ............................ 356
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped .......................... 360
▫Summer Operation ................... 365
▫Winter Operation .................... 365
▫Vacation/Storage .................... 366
▫Window Fogging And Frosting .......... 366
▫Outside Air Intake ................... 366
▫Operating Tips ...................... 367
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1 — Headlight Switch 7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 — Transfer Case Position Switch
2 — Instrument Cluster 8 — Power Outlet 14 — Ignition Switch
3 — Radio 9 — Lower Switch Bank 15 — Hood Release
4 — Upper Switch Bank 10 — Cup Holders 16 — Parking Brake Release
5 — Upper Glove Compartment 11 — Climate Controls
6 — Lower Glove Compartment 12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
SWITCH BANK BUTTON DESCRIPTION
Upper Switch Bank
The upper switch bank is located on the center of the
instrument panel.
1. TOW/HAUL
Refer to “Starting And Operating” for more information.
2. ESC OFF
Refer to “Starting And Operating” for more information.
3. HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
Refer to “What To Do In Emergencies” for more infor-
mation.
4. 115V POWER INVERTER
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
5. REAR PARK ASSIST
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
6. TPMS LIGHT LOAD — IF EQUIPPED
Refer to “Starting And Operating” for more information.
Lower Switch Bank
The lower switch bank is located on the center of the
instrument panel.
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. HEATED SEATS
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
2. VENTILATED SEATS
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
3. HEATED STEERING WHEEL
Refer to “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for more information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
The tachometer indicates engine speed in Revolutions
Per Minute (RPM x 1000).
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the tachometer
pointer at high RPM for extended periods. Engine
damage may occur.
2. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
•
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven
more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
•
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator remains on and does not flash, or flashes at a
rapid rate.
3. Fuel Gauge
Shows level of fuel in tank when ignition switch is in the
ON/RUN position.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealership for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer-
ship for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see “Main-
taining Your Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the
Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Speedometer
The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/km/h).
6. 4 LOW
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in
the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front and
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked to-
gether forcing the front and rear wheels to
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater
gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the
wheels.
For further information on four-wheel drive operation
and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation —
If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”.
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned to ON/RUN and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position, the light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required and you may experience reduced performance,
an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle
may require towing.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
8. 4WD Indicator
This light indicates the vehicle is in four-wheel
drive and 4LOCK. 4WD allows all four wheels
to receive torque from the engine simultane-
ously.
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
9. 4WD Auto Indicator
The 4WD auto indicator will be illuminated
whenever the four-wheel drive mode is auto-
matically engaged.
10. SVC (Service) 4WD
The SVC 4WD light monitors the electric shift
four-wheel drive system. If the SVC 4WD light
stays on or comes on during driving, it means
that the four-wheel drive system is not func-
tioning properly and that service is required.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
11. TOW/HAUL
The TOW HAUL button is located on the
center stack upper switch bank. This light will
illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.
12. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction In-
dicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to
ON/RUN.
•
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
13. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
14. Oil Pressure Gauge
The pointer should always indicate some oil pressure
when the engine is running. A continuous high or low
reading under normal driving conditions may indicate a
lubrication system malfunction. Immediate service
should be obtained from an authorized dealer.
15. Odometer/Trip Odometer Button/ECO (Fuel Saver
Indicator) Button — If Equipped
Press this button to toggle between the odometer display,
trip odometer display or the “ECO” display in the base
cluster. Holding the button in resets the trip odometer
reading when in trip mode.
If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) the “ECO” message will be displayed in the EVIC
display in the instrument cluster. Refer to ”Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for
further information.
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
16. Odometer Display / Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) Display Area — If Equipped
Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven. U.S. Federal regulations require
that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify
to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has
been driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or
serviced, the repair technician should leave the odometer
reading the same as it was before the repair or service. If
s/he cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero,
and a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating
what the mileage was before the repair or service. It is a
good idea for you to make a record of the odometer
reading before the repair/service, so that you can be sure
that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is
accurate if the odometer must be reset at zero.
The two trip odometers show individual trip mileage. To
switch from odometer to trip odometers, press and
release the TRIP ODOMETER button.
To reset a trip odometer, display the desired trip odom-
eter to be reset then push and hold the button for
approximately two seconds until the display resets.
Vehicle Odometer Messages
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following
messages will display in the odometer:
ECO ...................Fuel Saver Indicator Off
ECO-ON ................Fuel Saver Indicator On
noFUSE ..........................Fuse Fault
LoW tirE .................... TirePressure Low
CHANgE OIL............... OilChange Required
ESCOFF ............Electronic Stability Control Off
gASCAP ......................GasCapLoose
HOTOIL ...................Engine Oil Too Hot
LoCOOL................... LowEngine Coolant
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
NOTE: There is also an engine hour function. This
indicates the total number of hours the engine has been
running. To display the engine hours on the base cluster,
perform the following: Place the ignition in the ON/
RUN, but do not start the engine. With the odometer
value displayed, hold the TRIP button down for a period
of six seconds. The odometer will change to trip value
first, then it will display the engine hour value. The
engine hours will be displayed for a period of 30 seconds
until the ignition is turned OFF or the engine is started.
If equipped, some of the above warnings will be dis-
played in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) in the instrument cluster. Refer to ”Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for
further information.
ECO / ECO-ON (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
The ECO-ON indicator will illuminate when you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner and can be used to
modify driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
The ECO display will toggle between ECO and ECO-ON
depending on driving habits and vehicle usage. Press the
Odometer / Trip Odometer / ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator)
button to change the display from odometer to either of
the two trip odometer settings or the “ECO” display.
gASCAP
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
loose gascap indicator or the message “gASCAP” will
display in the odometer display area. Tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the TRIP button to turn off
the message. If the problem continues, the message will
appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose gas cap indicator will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) for the premium
cluster (Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle InformationCenter
(EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information).
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
LoW tirE
When the appropriate condition exists, the odometer
display will toggle between Lo and tirE for three cycles.
noFUSE
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the
Ignition Off Draw (IOD) fuse is improperly installed, or
damaged, a “noFUSE” message will display in the odom-
eter display area. For further information on fuses and
fuse locations refer to “Fuses” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”.
CHANgE OIL
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The CHANgE OIL message will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle-based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
17. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate
and a single chime will sound after reaching a set
threshold. Further overheating will cause the tempera-
ture gauge to pass H, the indicator will continuously
flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine
is allowed to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
18. Shift Lever Indicator
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
NOTE: In vehicles with 4.7L or 5.7L engines, the highest
available transmission gear is displayed in the lower
right corner of the Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) whenever the Electronic Range Select (ERS) fea-
ture is active. Use the +/- selector on the shift lever to
activate ERS. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
20. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that headlights are on high
beam. Push the multifunction lever forward to
switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
21. Voltmeter
When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the
electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay within
the normal range if the battery is charged. If the pointer
moves to either extreme left or right and remains there
during normal driving, the electrical system should be
serviced.
NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at
various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is
caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold
heater system. The number of cycles and the length of the
cycling operation is controlled by the engine control
module. Post-heat operation can run for several minutes,
and then the electrical system and voltmeter needle will
stabilize.
22. Cargo Light
The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo
light is activated by pressing the cargo light
button on the headlight switch.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
23. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the ABS, are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on
along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS
system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN posi-
tion.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
24. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
25. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
NOTE: The TPMS telltale is also accompanied by a
“Low Tire” message in the odometer (Base Cluster), or in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) screen
indicating “Low Tire” for EVIC enabled clusters.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic (OBDII) system which
monitors the emissions and engine control sys-
tem. If the vehicle is ready for emissions testing, the light
will come on when the ignition is first turned on and
remain on, as a bulb check, until the engine is started. If
the vehicle is not ready for emissions testing the light will
come on when the ignition is first turned on and remain
on for 15 seconds, then blink for 5 seconds, and remain on
until the vehicle is started. If the bulb does not come on
during starting, have the condition investigated promptly.
If this light comes on and remains on while driving, it
suggests a potential engine control problem and the need
for system service.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
damage to the engine control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage and
power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
27. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
28. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
29. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake system is
not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
30. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off-road operation). If this
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this warn-
ing light will display in the Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Informa-
tion Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further
information.
31. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat
belt remains unbuckled, the seat belt reminder light will
flash or remain on continuously. Refer to “Occupant
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
Vehicle” for further information.
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
32. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). Refer to ”Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — If Equipped” for further information.
33. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
NOTE:
•
The compass on your vehicle is self-calibrating, elimi-
nating the need to manually calibrate the compass.
•
The EVIC main menu will display Radio Off, AM/FM
and SAT radio stations, and AUX/HDD sources at the
top of the main menu above Fuel Economy.
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pressing the switches
mounted on the steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the
following:
•
Compass and Outside Temperature
•
Audio Information
•
Fuel Economy
•
Vehicle Information
•
Warning Messages
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Customer Programmable Features (System Setup)
•
Trip Information (in Odometer line)
Press and release the UP button to scroll
upward through the main menus and sub-
menus.
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the main menus and sub-
menus.
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus or sub-menus. Press and hold
the SELECT button for two seconds to reset
features.
BACK Button
Press the BACK button to scroll back to a
previous menu or sub-menu.
EVIC Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
•
Left front turn signal lamp out
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
•
Right front turn signal lamp out
•
Left rear turn signal lamp out
•
Right rear turn signal lamp out
•
Service air filter
•
Perform service
•
ESC System Off
•
Coolant Low
•
Check Trailer Brake Wiring
•
Service Trailer Brake System
•
Trailer Brake Connected
•
Lights On
•
RKE Battery Low
•
ECO (Fuel Saver Indicator) — If Equipped
•
Wrong Key
•
Damaged Key
•
Key not programmed
•
Key In Ignition
•
Turn Signal On
•
Park Assist System On
•
Park Assist System Off
•
Oil Change Due > Dealer Info
•
Warning Object Detected
•
Service Park Assist System
•
System Setup Unavailable — Vehicle Not in Park
•
Remote start aborted — Door ajar
•
Remote start aborted — Hood ajar
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Remote start aborted — Fuel low
•
Remote start active — Key to Run
•
Remote start disabled — System fault
•
System Setup Unavailable — Vehicle in Motion
(manual transmission)
•
Remote Start Disable — Start Vehicle to Reset
•
Service Four Wheel Drive System
•
Clean Park Assist sensors
•
Front Park Assist Not available - Blinded
•
Rear Park Assist Not available - Blinded
•
Low Fuel
•
Service blind spot system
•
Blind spot system off
•
Blind spot detection unavailable
•
Automatic High Beams on
•
Automatic High Beams off
•
Clearing channels
•
Channels cleared
•
Channels defaulted
•
Channel X transmitting
•
Channel X training
•
Channel X trained
•
Did not train
•
Memory 1 Profile Set
•
Memory 2 Profile Set
•
Memory System Unavailable — Not in Park
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
•
Memory 1 Profile Recall
•
Memory 2 Profile Recall
•
Adjustable Pedals Unavail — Veh in Reverse
•
Adjustable Pedals Unavail — Cruise Engaged
EVIC Warning Lights
•
Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
•
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
•
Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an autho-
rized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Electronic Speed Control Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON.
•
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho-
rized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is
required. You may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle or engine stall and your vehicle may
require towing.
•
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H, the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for more information.
•
SERV 4WD
The SERV 4WD light monitors the electric shift
4WD system. If the SERV 4WD light stays on or
comes on during driving, it means that the
4WD system is not functioning properly and
that service is required.
•
Transmission Temperature Light
This light indicates that there is excessive trans-
mission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition, such as 4-wheel-drive
operation (e.g., snow plowing, off- road operation). If this
light comes on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or faster, with the transmission in NEUTRAL until the
light goes off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Indicator illuminated will eventually cause se-
vere transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Light is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Loose Gascap Indicator
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the telltale display area. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the SELECT button
to turn off the message. If the problem continues, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Oil Change Due
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The Oil Change Due message will
flash in the EVIC display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON position. To
turn off the message temporarily, press and release the
BACK button. To reset the oil change indicator system
(after performing the scheduled maintenance), perform
the following steps.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. (Do not
start the engine)
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the engine, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat these steps.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
Fuel Economy / Fuel Saver Mode / Distance To
Empty (DTE) — If Equipped
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read “0”
or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the history
information will be erased, and the averaging will con-
tinue from the last fuel average reading before the reset.
Fuel Saver Mode
ECO will display in the Compass / Outside Temperature
line of the EVIC. This message will appear whenever the
Multi-Displacement System (MDS) (if equipped) allows
the engine to operate on four cylinders, or if you are
driving in a fuel efficient manner.
This feature allows you to monitor when you are driving
in a fuel efficient manner, and it can be used to modify
driving habits in order to increase fuel economy.
Fuel Saver Mode — On
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Distance To Empty (DTE) Shows the estimated distance
that can be traveled with the fuel remaining in the tank.
This estimated distance is determined by a weighted
average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy,
according to the current fuel tank level. DTE cannot be
reset through the RETURN button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 10 miles (16 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙text and a new DTE value will display.
Trip Functions
Press and release the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER
button until one of the following Trip Functions display
in the EVIC odometer line:
•
Trip A
•
Trip B
•
Elapsed Time
Press the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button to
cycle through all the Trip Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
•
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
•
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
•
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press (for approximately two seconds) and
release the ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button once
to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset
all resettable functions, press and release the
ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER button a second time
within three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed
function. (Reset ALL will display during this three-
second window).
Vehicle Info (Customer Information Features)
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Vehicle
Info” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
Press the UP and DOWN button to scroll through the
available information displays, then press SELECT to
display any one of the following choices.
•
Coolant Temp
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
•
Oil Pressure
Displays the actual oil pressure.
•
Trans Temperature — If Equipped
Displays the actual transmission temperature.
•
Trailer Brake — If Equipped
Displays trailer brake output power and trailer brake
status indicator.
•
Engine Hours
Displays the number of hours of engine operation.
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tire PSI
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Tire
PSI” displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button.
This will display the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(shows the current pressure of all four road tires). For
additional information, refer to “Tire Pressure Monitor
System” in “Starting And Operating”.
NOTE:
•
Tires heat up during normal driving conditions. Heat
will cause the tire pressure to increase from 2 to 6 psi
(14 to 41 kPa) during normal driving conditions. Refer
to “Tires-General Information/Tire Inflation Pres-
sures” in “Starting And Operating” for additional
information.
•
Your system can be set to display pressure units in PSI,
kPa, or BAR.
Units
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until “Units”
displays in the EVIC and press the SELECT button. The
EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) can
be changed between English and Metric units of mea-
sure. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the
preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Tire Pressure Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Compass / Temperature Display
The compass readings indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing. The EVIC will display one of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature.
NOTE:
•
The system will display the last known outside tem-
perature when starting the vehicle and may need to be
driven several minutes before the updated tempera-
ture is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect
the displayed temperature; therefore, temperature
readings are not updated when the vehicle is not
moving.
•
During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped with
outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient tem-
perature. The higher displayed temperature is due to
blocked or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient
temperature sensor caused by the snowplow. In addi-
tion, on vehicles equipped with Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC), it is suggested that the interior
cabin temperature be manually controlled should the
system not perform as desired while in automatic
mode. Both the outside temperature display and ATC
operation will return to normal when the snowplow is
removed.
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually reset the compass. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display CAL until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the CAL indicator
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually, as follows:
1. Turn ON the ignition switch.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” is
displayed in the EVIC then press and release the SELECT
button.
4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will be displayed in the
EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
indicator turns off. The compass will now function
normally.
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
differences, and provide the most accurate compass
heading. For the most accurate compass performance, the
compass must be set using the following steps.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press the UP or DOWN button until the System Setup
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu is reached,
then press the SELECT button.
3. Press the DOWN button until the “Compass Variance”
message is displayed in the EVIC, then press the SELECT
button. The last variance zone number displays in the
EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected, according to the map.
5. Press and release the BACK button to exit.
Customer-Programmable Features
(System Setup)
Personal Settings allows you to set and recall features
when the transmission is in PARK. If the transmission is
out of PARK or the vehicle begins moving, a warning
message SYSTEM SETUP NOT AVAILABLE, is fol-
lowed in three seconds by, VEHICLE NOT IN PARK.
Compass Variance Map
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and release the UP or DOWN button until System
Setup displays in the EVIC. Press the SELECT button to
enter the System Setup Sub-Menu.
Use the UP or DOWN button to display one of the
following choices.
Select Language
When in this display you may select one of five lan-
guages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the UP or DOWN button while in this display and scroll
through the language choices. Press the SELECT button
to select English, Spanish (Español), French (Français),
Italian (Italiano), German (Deutsch), and Dutch (Neder-
lands). Then, as you continue, the information will dis-
play in the selected language.
Nav–Turn By Turn
When this feature is selected, the navigation system
utilizes voice commands, guiding through the drive
route, mile by mile, turn-by-turn until the final destina-
tion is reached. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Park Assist System
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission is in the REVERSE
position and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF through the EVIC. To
make your selection, scroll up or down until the pre-
ferred setting is highlighted, then press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Refer
to “Rear Park Assist System” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle” for system function and oper-
ating information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Auto Unlock Doors
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated, or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Remote Unlock Sequence
When Unlock Driver Door Only On 1st Press is selected,
only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press is selected, all of
the doors will unlock on the first press of the RKE
transmitter UNLOCK button. To make your selection,
scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high-
lighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the
setting has been selected.
RKE Linked To Memory
When this feature is selected the memory seat, mirror,
pedals, and radio settings will return to the memory set
position when the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button is
pressed. If this feature is not selected then the memory
seat, mirror, and radio settings can only return to the
memory set position using the seat mounted switch. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Remote Start Comfort Sys.
When this feature is selected and the remote start is
activated, the heated steering wheel and driver heated
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
seat features will automatically turn on when tempera-
tures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When temperatures are
above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will turn on
when remote start is activated. These features will stay on
through the duration of remote start or until the key is
turned to RUN. To make your selection, press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter REMOTE START button
is pressed. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will
occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed.
This feature may be selected with or without the Flash
Lamps with Lock feature. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
Flash Lamps With Lock
When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn
signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked
with the RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected
with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected.
To make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
Headlamp Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, scroll
up or down until the preferred setting is highlighted,
then press and release the SELECT button until a check-
mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting
has been selected.
Headlamps With Wipers
When this feature is selected and the HEADLIGHT
switch is in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn
on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned
on. The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press and release the SELECT button until
a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the
system has been activated or the check-mark is removed
showing the system has been deactivated.
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press and release the SELECT
button until a check-mark appears next to the feature
showing the system has been activated or the check-mark
is removed showing the system has been deactivated.
Refer to “Lights/SmartBeam™ — If Equipped” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Intermittent Wiper Options — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically
activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture on the
windshield. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated. When this feature is deactivated, the system
reverts to the standard intermittent wiper operation.
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
When this feature is selected it provides automatic driver
seat positioning to enhance driver mobility when enter-
ing and exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the SELECT button until a check-mark ap-
pears next to the feature showing the system has been
activated or the check-mark is removed showing the
system has been deactivated.
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the RKE transmitter is used to unlock the
door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key-Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening either
front vehicle door will cancel this feature. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Illuminated Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your
selection, scroll up or down until the preferred setting is
highlighted, then press and release the SELECT button
until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing
that the setting has been selected.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Operating” for system function and operating informa-
tion. To make your selection, press and release the
SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to the
feature showing the system has been activated or the
check-mark is removed showing the system has been
deactivated.
Display Fuel Saver — If Equipped
The “Fuel Saver Mode” message is located in the
Compass/Temperature display; this message can be
turned on or off. To make your selection, press and
release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears
next to the feature showing the system has been activated
or the check-mark is removed showing the system has
been deactivated.
Trailer Brake Type
When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can
be changed between “Light Electric” and “Heavy Elec-
tric”. To make your selection, scroll up or down until the
preferred setting is highlighted, then press and release
the SELECT button until a check-mark appears next to
the setting, showing that the setting has been selected.
Refer to “Integrated Trailer Brake Module” in “Starting
And Operating.”
Calibrate Compass
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
Compass Variance
Refer to “Compass Display” for more information.
MEDIA CENTER 730N/430/430N (RHR/RER/RBZ/
RHB) CD/DVD/HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
Refer to your Uconnect™ Multimedia RHR, RER, RBZ or
RHB user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
MEDIA CENTER 130 (SALES CODE RES)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Media Center 130 (RES)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224, 192,
160, 128, 112, 96,
80, 64, 56, 48, 40,
32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144, 112,
96, 80, 64, 56, 48,
40, 32, 24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
MEDIA CENTER 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
(SALES CODE RES+RSC)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
Media Center 130 (RES/RSC)
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
Voice Command Button Uconnect™ Phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
Phone Button Uconnect™ Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect™ Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the
Uconnect™ User Manual located on the DVD for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
Uconnect Phone” message will display on the radio
screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
and radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
No program type or
undefined None
Adult Hits Adlt Hit
Classical Classicl
Classic Rock Cls Rock
College College
Country Country
Foreign Language Language
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Information Inform
Jazz Jazz
News News
Nostalgia Nostalga
Oldies Oldies
Personality Persnlty
Public Public
Rhythm and Blues R & B
Religious Music Rel Musc
Religious Talk Rel Talk
Rock Rock
Soft Soft
Soft Rock Soft Rck
Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R&B
Sports Sports
Talk Talk
Program Type 16-Digit Character Display
Top 40 Top 40
Weather Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
•
Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to save time change.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•
This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
•
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
•
The RES Media Center is a single CD player. Do
not attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Ran-
dom Play.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•
Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•
Maximum number of files: 255
•
Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
•
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•
Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
•
Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙and a three-
character extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3 48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3 24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•
Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•
Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
•
Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxil-
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel-
come kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at www-
.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect™ Multimedia (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
•
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
•
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect™ Multimedia
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con-
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa-
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail-
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
to normal display).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be se-
lected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
•
Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but-
ton, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons1-6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions (Uconnect™ Phone) — If
Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect™ Phone” in the Uconnect™ User
Manual located on the DVD for further details.
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ/
REL/RET radios only with Uconnect™. For sales code
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 touch-screen radio
iPod威/USB/MP3 control feature, refer to the separate
RBZ/RHB, RHR, RHP, RHW or RB2 User’s Manual.
iPod威/USB/MP3 control is available only if equipped as
an option with these radios.
This feature allows an iPod威or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port, located in the glove compart-
ment.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
iPod威control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威devices. Some iPod威software versions may
not fully support the iPod威control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
•
If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect™ Multimedia radio User’s Manual for
iPod威or external USB device support capability.
•
Connecting an iPod威or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威/MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
Connecting The iPod姞Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB connector port which is
located in the glove compartment.
NOTE: The glove compartment will have a position
where the iPod威or consumer electronic audio device
cable can be routed through without damaging the cable
when closing the lid. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
USB Connector Port
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
not available in the glove compartment, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to
USB port:
•
The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•
The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威contents.
•
The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device)
Controlling The iPod姞Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
⬙USB⬙or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod威or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威or external
USB device and display data:
•
Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or
previous track.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
•
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one
click, will jump to the previous track in the list or
press the VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
•
Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of
the current track.
•
Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF >> button.
•
A single press backward << RW or forward FF >> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five
seconds.
•
Use the << SEEK and SEEK >> buttons to jump to the
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK >> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
Track⬙.
•
While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•
Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
•
Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 de-
vice scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK >> buttons will select the previ-
ous and next tracks.
•
RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙.IftheRND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
•
TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
•
Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclock-
wise (backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying
the track detail on the radio display. Once the track
to be played is highlighted on the radio display,
press the TUNE control knob to select and start
playing the track. Turning the TUNE control knob
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
fast will scroll through the list faster. During fast
scroll, a slight delay in updating the information on
the radio display may be noticeable.
•
During all List modes, the iPod威displays all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the
bottom of the list, just turn the wheel backward
(counterclockwise) to get to the track faster.
•
In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威or
external USB device.
•
Preset 1 – Playlists
•
Preset 2 – Artists
•
Preset 3 – Albums
•
Preset 4 – Genres
•
Preset 5 – Audiobooks
•
Preset 6 – Podcasts
•
Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on
the second line.
•
To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•
LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
level menu of the iPod威or external USB device. Turn
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
track in that list. Not all iPod威or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
•
MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
•
Leaving the iPod威or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in
extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or
damage the device. Follow the device manufactur-
er’s guidelines.
•
Placing items on the iPod威or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect™ phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect™
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect™ phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting Different Audio Device
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect™ phone system to list audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
music on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
previous track music on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
current song that is playing will display info.
UCONNECT™ MULTIMEDIA VIDEO
ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)™ — IF EQUIPPED
Getting Started
•
Screen located in the overhead console : Unfold the
overhead LCD screen by pushing the button on the
overhead console behind the screen.
Overhead Video Screen
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
With the ignition switch in the ON or ACC position,
turn the radio on by pushing the ON/OFF Volume
Control knob.
•
When the Video Screen are open and a DVD is inserted
into the radio, the screen turns on automatically, the
headphone transmitters turn on and playback begins.
Single Video Screen
NOTE: Typically there are two different ways to operate
the features of the Video Entertainment System (VES)™.
•
The Remote Control
•
The Touch-Screen Radio (If Equipped)
Play A DVD
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
Or
Press the LOAD button then corresponding number (1–6)
where the DVD is to be loaded (Non-Touch-Screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
3. Ensure the VES™ Remote Control and the Headphone
switch is on Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight DISC by
either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by re-
peatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
on the Remote Control.
NOTE: The VES™ system will retain the last setting
when turned off.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list appears on the right side of the
screen, touch the HIDE LIST soft-key to display the Rear
VES Controls screen.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
Rear VES Soft-key
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the 1 soft-key and then the DISC soft-key in the
MEDIA column. To exit touch the back arrow soft-key at
the top left of the screen.
NOTE: The “1” and “2” soft-keys are displayed for the
headphone channels. Touch 1 or 2 based on which
channel you want to change, select the new mode from
the available list on the right. Modes that are unavailable
are greyed-out.
NOTE:
•
To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
Select Channel/Screen 1 And
DISC In The MEDIA Column
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
•
Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
•
Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func-
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn off the remote control screen
functions.
Play Video Games
Connect the video game console to the Auxiliary RCA
input jacks located on the back of the center console.
1. Video In – Yellow
2. Left Audio In – White
3. Right Audio In – Red
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When connecting an external source to the AUX input, be
sure to follow the standard color coding for the VES™
jacks:
NOTE: Certain high-end video games, such as Playsta-
tion3 and XBox360 will exceed the power limit of the
vehicle’s Power Inverter. Refer to the Power Inverter
section in your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual for more
information.
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 1.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at the video screen, highlight VES AUX
1, by either pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by
repeatedly pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER
on the Remote Control.
Select VES AUX1 Mode On The VES Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
3. Touch the 1 or 2 based on the headphone channel you
want to change. To exit press the back arrow soft-key at
the top of the screen.
Rear VES Soft-key
Select Channel/Screen 1 And
AUX 1 In The VES Column
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listen To An Audio Source On Channel 2 While A
Video Is Playing On Channel 1
Ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch is on
Channel 2.
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control and
the Mode Select Screen will display, unless a video is
playing then only a small banner will appear on the
bottom of the screen.
2. While looking at the video screen, either press Up/
Down/Left/Right on the Remote Control to highlight the
desired audio source or repeatedly press the MODE
button on the remote until the desired audio source
appears on the screen.
Select FM Mode On The VES Screen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
3. To listen to an audio source on Channel 2 while a
video is playing on Channel 1, touch the 2 soft-key and
choose an audio source. To exit touch the back arrow
soft-key at the top left of the left screen.
Rear VES Soft-key
Select Channel/Screen 2 And HDD
In The MEDIA Column
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Important Notes For Single Video Screen System
•
VES™ is able to transmit two channels of stereo audio
simultaneously.
•
In split screen mode the left side equates to Channel 1
and right side equates to Channel 2.
•
If a video source is selected on Channel 1, then
Channel 2 is for audio only. Selecting a video source
(DVD) will not show the video on the screen.
•
When selecting a video source on Channel 1, the video
will display on the screen and the audio could be
heard on Channel 1 in the headphones.
•
Audio can be heard through the headphones even
when the Video Screen is closed
Play A DVD Using The Touch-Screen Radio
1. Press the OPEN/CLOSE or LOAD hard-key on the
radio faceplate (Touch-Screen).
2. Insert the DVD with the label facing up. The radio
automatically selects the appropriate mode after the disc
is recognized and displays the menu screen or starts
playing the first track.
3. To watch a DVD on Screen 1 for second row passen-
gers, ensure the Remote Control and Headphone switch
is on Channel 1.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Using The Remote Control
1. Press the MODE button on the Remote Control.
2. While looking at Screen 1, highlight DISC by either
pressing Up/Down/Left/Right buttons or by repeatedly
pressing the MODE button, then press ENTER.
NOTE:
•
Channel/Screen 1 select mode information is shown
on the left side of the screen.
•
Channel/Screen 2 select mode information is shown
on the right side of the screen.
Using The Touch-Screen Radio Controls
1. Press the MENU hard-key on the radio faceplate.
2. Touch the Rear VES soft-key to display the Rear VES
Controls. If a channel list is displayed, press the HIDE
LIST soft-key to display the Rear VES Controls screen.
Select DISC Mode On The VES Screen
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Touch the 1 or 2 soft-key based on the channel you
want to change and then the DISC soft-key in the MEDIA
column. To exit touch the back arrow at the top left of the
screen.
NOTE:
•
To view a DVD on the radio press the RADIO/MEDIA
hard-key, on the radio faceplate, then touch the DISC
tab soft-key and then the VIEW VIDEO soft-key.
•
Viewing a DVD on the Touch-Screen radio screen is
not available in all states/provinces, and the vehicle
must be stopped, and the shift lever must be in the
PARK position for vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion. In vehicles with manual transmission the parking
brake must be engaged.
•
Touching the screen on a Touch-Screen radio while a
DVD is playing brings up basic remote control func-
tions for DVD play such as scene selection, Play,
Pause, FF, RW, and Stop. Pressing the X in the upper
corner will turn off the remote control screen
functions.
Rear VES Soft-key
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Remote Control
Controls And Indicators
1. Power – Turns the screen and wireless headphone
transmitter for the selected Channel on or off. To hear
audio while the screen is closed, press the Power button
to turn the headphone transmitter on.
2. Channel Selector Indicators – When a button is
pressed, the currently affected channel or channel button
is illuminated momentarily.
3. Light – Turns the remote control backlighting on or off.
The remote backlighting turns off automatically after five
seconds.
4. Channel/Screen Selector Switch - Indicates which
channel is being controlled by the remote control. When
the selector switch is in the Channel 1 position, the
remote controls the functionality of headphone Channel
1 (right side of the screen). When the selector switch is in
the Channel 2, position the remote controls the function-
ality of headphone Channel 2 (left side of the screen).
5. 䉴䉴 – In radio modes, press to seek the next tunable
station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast forward
through the current audio track or video chapter. In
menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
Remote Control
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. 䉲/ Prev – In radio modes, press to select to the
previous station. In disc modes, press to advance to the
start of the current or previous audio track or video
chapter. In menu modes, use to navigate in the menu.
7. MENU – Press to return to the main menu of a DVD
disc, to select a satellite audio channel from the Station
list, or select playback modes (SCAN/RANDOM for a
CD).
8. 䉴/㥋(Play/Pause) – Begin/resume or pause disc play.
9. 䡲(Stop) – Stops disc play
10. PROG Up/Down – When listening to a radio mode,
pressing PROG Up selects the next preset and pressing
PROG Down selects the previous preset stored in the
radio. When listening to compressed audio on a data
disc, PROG Up selects the next directory and PROG
Down selects the previous directory. When listening to a
disc in a radio with a multiple-disc changer, PROG Up
selects the next disc and PROG Down selects the previ-
ous disc.
11. MUTE – Press to mute the headphone audio output
for the selected channel.
12. SLOW – Press to slow playback of a DVD disc. Press
play (䉴) to resume normal play.
13. STATUS – Press to display the current status.
14. MODE – Press to change the mode of the selected
channel. See the Mode Selection section of this manual
for details on changing modes.
15. SETUP – When in a video mode, press the SETUP
button to access the display settings (see the display
settings section) to access the DVD setup menu, select the
menu button on the radio. When a disc is loaded in the
DVD player (if equipped) and the VES™ mode is selected
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
and the disc is stopped, press the SETUP button to access
the DVD Setup menu. (see the DVD Setup Menu of this
manual.)
16. BACK – When navigating in menu mode, press to
return to the previous screen. When navigating a DVDs
disc menu, the operation depends on the disc’s contents.
17. 䉳䉳 – In radio modes, press to seek to the previous
tunable station. In disc modes, press and hold to fast
rewind through the current audio track or video chapter.
In menu modes use to navigate in the menu.
18. ENTER – Press to select the highlighted option in a
menu.
19. 䉱/ NEXT – In radio modes, press to select to the
next station. In disc modes, press to advance to the next
audio track or video chapter. In menu modes, use to
navigate in the menu.
Remote Control Storage
The video screen(s) come with a built in storage compart-
ment for the remote control which is accessible when the
screen is opened. To remove the remote, use your index
finger to pull and rotate the remote towards you. Do not
try to pull the remote straight down as it will be very
difficult to remove. To return the remote back into its
storage area, insert one long edge of the remote into the
two retaining clips first, and then rotate the remote back
up into the other two retaining clips until it snaps back
into position.
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Locking The Remote Control
All remote control functionality can be disabled as a
parental control feature.
•
To disable the Remote Control from making any
changes, press the Video Lock button add follow the
radio’s instructions (select menu, rear ves, lock). If the
vehicle is not equipped with a DVD player, follow the
radio’s instructions to turn Video Lock on. The radio
and the video screen(s) indicate when Video Lock is
active.
•
Pressing the Video Lock again or turning the ignition
OFF turns Video Lock OFF and allows remote control
operation of the VES™.
Replacing The Batteries
The remote control requires two AAA batteries for op-
eration. To replace the batteries:
•
Locate the battery compartment on the back of the
remote, then slide the battery cover downward.
•
Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
•
Replace the battery compartment cover.
The Remote Control Storage
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Headphones Operation
The headphones receive two separate channels of audio
using an infrared transmitter from the video screen.
Front seat occupants receive some headphone audio
coverage to allow them to adjust the headphone volume
for the young rear seat occupants that may not be able to
do so for themselves.
If no audio is heard after increasing the volume control,
verify that the screen is turned on and in the down
position and that the channel is not muted and the
headphone channel selector switch is on the desired
channel. If audio is still not heard, check that fully
charged batteries are installed in the headphones.
1. Volume Control
2. Power Button
3. Channel Selection Switch
4. Power Indicator
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controls
The headphone power indicator and controls are located
on the right ear cup.
NOTE: The rear video system must be turned on before
sound can be heard from the headphones. To conserve
battery life, the headphones will automatically turn off
approximately three minutes after the rear video system
is turned off.
Changing the Audio Mode for Headphones
1. Ensure the Remote Control channel/screen selector
switch is in the same position as the headphone selector
switch..
NOTE:
•
When both switches are on Channel 1, the Remote is
controlling Channel 1 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 1.
•
When both switches are on Channel 2, the Remote is
controlling Channel 2 and the headphones are tuned
to the audio of the VES™ Channel 2.
2. Press the MODE button on the remote control.
3. If the video screen is displaying a video source (such
as a DVD Video), pressing STATUS shows the status on a
popup banner at the bottom of the screen. Pressing the
MODE button will advance to the next mode. When the
mode is in an audio only source (such as FM), the Mode
Selection menu appears on screen.
4. When the Mode Selection menu appears on screen,
use the cursor buttons on the remote control to navigate
to the available modes and press the ENTER button to
select the new mode.
5. To cancel out of the Mode Selection menu, press the
BACK button on the remote control.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Replacing The Batteries
Each set of headphones requires two AAA batteries for
operation. To replace the batteries:
•
Locate the battery compartment on the left ear cup of
the headphones, and then slide the battery cover
downward.
•
Replace the batteries, making sure to orient them
according to the polarity diagram shown.
•
Replace the battery compartment cover.
Unwired姞Stereo Headphone Lifetime Limited
Warranty
Who Does This Warranty Cover? This warranty covers
the initial user or purchaser (⬙you⬙or ⬙your⬙) of this
particular Unwired Technology LLC (⬙Unwired⬙) wire-
less headphone (⬙Product⬙). The warranty is not transfer-
able.
How Long Does The Coverage Last? This warranty lasts
as long as you own the Product.
What Does This Warranty Cover? Except as specified
below, this warranty covers any Product that in normal
use is defective in workmanship or materials.
What Does This Warranty Not Cover? This warranty
does not cover any damage or defect that results from
misuse, abuse or modification of the Product other than
by Unwired. Foam earpieces, which will wear over time
through normal use, are specifically not covered (replace-
ment foam is available for a nominal charge). UNWIRED
TECHNOLOGY IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY INJURIES
OR DAMAGES TO PERSONS OR PROPERTY RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF, OR ANY FAILURE OR DE-
FECT IN, THE PRODUCT, NOR IS UNWIRED LIABLE
FOR ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, EXEMPLARY, PU-
NITIVE OR OTHER DAMAGES OF ANY KIND OR
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NATURE WHATSOEVER. Some states and jurisdictions
may not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damages, so the above limitation may not
apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal
rights. You may also have other rights, which vary from
jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
What Will Unwired威Do? Unwired威, at its option, will
repair or replace any defective Product. Unwired威re-
serves the right to replace any discontinued Product with
a comparable model. THIS WARRANTY IS THE SOLE
WARRANTY FOR THIS PRODUCT, SETS FORTH YOUR
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY REGARDING DEFECTIVE
PRODUCTS, AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WAR-
RANTIES (EXPRESS OR IMPLIED), INCLUDING ANY
WARRANTY OR MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
If you have any questions or comments regarding your
Unwired威wireless headphones, please phone 1-888-293-
3332 or email customersupport@unwiredtechnology.com.
You may register your Unwired威wireless headphones
online at www.unwiredtechnology.com or by phone at
1-888-293-3332.
System Information
Shared Modes
This allows the VES™ to output radio sources to the
headphones and the radio to output VES™ sources to the
vehicle speakers. When the radio and VES™ channel 1 or
2 are in the same (shared) mode, a VES™ icon will be
visible on the radio’s display for that channel, and the
shared icon will be visible on the VES™ screen. When in
shared mode, the same audio source is heard in the
shared headphone channel 1 or channel 2.
If the radio functions (FM, AM, or SAT) are in the shared
mode with the VES™, only the radio is able to control the
radio functions. In this case, VES™ can share the radio
mode, but not change stations until the radio mode is
changed to a mode that is different from the VES™
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
selected radio mode. When shared, the radio has priority
over the VES™ or all radio modes (FM, AM). The VES™
has the ability to switch tuner (AM/FM), SEEK, SCAN,
TUNE, and recall presets in radio modes as long as it is
not in shared mode.
When in shared disc both the radio and the VES™ have
control of the video functions. The VES™ has the ability
to control the following video modes:
1. CD: Ability to Fast Forward, Rewind, Scan, and Track
Up/Down.
2. CD Changer (in radio): Ability to Disk Up/Down and
program all listed CD controls (Fast Forward, Rewind,
Scan, and Track Up/Down).
The VES™ can even control radio modes or video modes
while the radio is turned off. The VES™ can access the
radio modes or disc modes by navigating to those modes
on the VES™ and activating a radio mode or disc mode.
Information Mode Display
1. Channel 1 Mode
2. Channel 1 Shared Status
3. Channel 1 Audio Only/Mute
4. Channel 2 Mode
Information Mode Video Screen Display
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. Channel 2 Shared Status
6. Channel 2 Audio Only/Mute
7. Channel 1 ENTER Button Action
8. Channel 2 ENTER Button Action
9. Clock
10. Video Lock
11. Not Available / Error
12. Disc Changer Status
Numeric Keypad Menu
When the display for either Channel 1 or Channel 2
shows DIRECT TUNE, pressing the remote control’s
ENTER button activates a numeric keypad menu. This
Numeric Keypad Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
screen makes it easy to enter a specific tuner frequency,
satellite channel, or track number. To enter the desired
digit:
1. Press the remote control’s navigation buttons (䉱,䉲,
䉴,䉳) to navigate to the desired digit.
2. When the digit is highlighted, press the remote con-
trol’s ENTER button to select the digit. Repeat these steps
until all digits are entered.
3. To delete the last digit, navigate to the Del button and
press the remote control’s ENTER button.
4. After all of the digits are entered, navigate to the Go
button and press the remote control’s ENTER button.
Station List Menu
When listening to Satellite audio, pressing the remote
control’s MENU button displays a list of all available
channels. Navigate this list using the remote control’s
navigation buttons (䉱,䉲) to find the desired station,
press the remote control’s ENTER button to tune to that
station. To jump through the list more quickly, navigate
to the Page Up and Page Down icons on the screen.
Disc Menu
Disc Menu For CDs
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When listening to a CD Audio or CD Data disc, pressing
the remote control’s MENU button displays a list of all
commands which control playback of the disc. Using the
options you can activate or cancel Scan play and Random
play.
Display Settings
When watching a video source (DVD Video with the disc
in Play mode, Aux Video, SIRIUS Backseat TV™, etc.),
pressing the remote control’s SETUP button activates the
Display Settings menu. These settings control the appear-
ance of the video on the screen. The factory default
settings are already set for optimum viewing, so there is
no need to change these settings under normal circum-
stances.
To change the settings, press the remote control’s navi-
gation buttons (䉱,䉲) to select an item, then press the
remote control’s navigation buttons (䉴,䉳) to change the
value for the currently selected item. To reset all values
back to the original settings, select the Default Settings
menu option and press the remote control’s ENTER
button.
Disc Features control the remote DVD player’s (if
equipped) settings of DVD being watched in the remote
player.
Video Screen Display Settings
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Listening To Audio With The Screen Closed
To listen to only audio portion of the channel with the
screen closed:
•
Set the audio to the desired source and channel.
•
Close the video screen.
•
To change the current audio mode, press the remote
control’s MODE button. This will automatically select
the next available audio mode without using the Mode
Select menu.
•
When the screen is reopened, the video screen will
automatically turn back on and show the appropriate
display menu or media.
If the screen is closed and there is no audio heard, verify
that the headphones are turned on (the ON indicator is
illuminated) and the headphone selector switch is on the
desired channel. If the headphones are turned on, press
the remote control’s power button to turn audio on. If
audio is still not heard, check that fully charged batteries
are installed in the headphones.
Disc Formats
The VES™ DVD player is capable of playing the follow-
ing types of discs (12 mm or 8 mm diameter):
•
DVD-Video discs (MPEG-2 video compression) (see
notes about DVD Region Codes)
•
DVD-Audio discs (2 channel audio output only)
•
Audio Compact Discs (CDs)
•
CD Data discs with MP3 and WMA compressed audio
format files
•
Video CDs (MPEG-1 video compression)
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DVD Region Codes
The VES™ DVD player and many DVD discs are coded
by geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the player, the
disc will not play and will be ejected.
DVD Audio Support
When a DVD-Audio disc is inserted in the VES™ DVD
player, the DVD-Audio title on the disc is played by
default (most DVD-Audio discs also have a Video title,
but the Video title is ignored). All multi-channel program
material is automatically mixed down to two channels,
which may result in a lowered apparent volume level. If
you increase the volume level to account for this change
in level, remember to lower the volume before changing
the disc or to another mode.
Recorded Discs
The VES™ DVD player will play CD-R and CD-RW discs
recorded in CD-Audio or Video-CD format, or as a
CD-ROM containing MP3 or WMA files. The player will
also play DVD-Video content recorded to a DVD-R or
DVD-RW disc. DVD-ROM discs (either pressed or re-
corded) are not supported.
If you record a disc using a personal computer, there may
be cases where the VES™ DVD player may not be able to
play some or the entire disc, even if it is recorded in a
compatible format and is playable on other players. To
help avoid playback problems, use the following guide-
lines when recording discs.
•
Open sessions are ignored. Only sessions that are
closed are playable.
•
For multi-session CDs that contain only multiple CD-
Audio sessions, the player will renumber the tracks so
each track number is unique.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
•
For CD Data (or CD-ROM) discs, always use the
ISO-9660 (Level 1 or Level 2), Joliet, or Romeo format.
Other formats (such as UDF, HFS, or others) are not
supported.
•
The player recognizes a maximum of 512 files and 99
folders per CD-R and CD-RW disc.
•
Mixed media recordable DVD formats will only play
the Video_TS portion of the disc.
If you are still having trouble writing a disc that is
playable in the VES™ DVD player, check with the disc
recording software publisher for more information about
burning playable discs.
The recommended method for labeling recordable discs
(CD-R, CD-RW, and DVD-R) is with a permanent marker.
Do not use adhesive labels as they may separate from the
disc, become stuck, and cause permanent damage to the
DVD player.
Compressed Audio Files (MP3 and WMA)
The DVD player is capable of playing MP3 (MPEG-1
Audio Layer 3) and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files
from a CD Data disc (usually a CD-R or CD-RW).
•
The DVD player always uses the file extension to
determine the audio format, so MP3 files must always
end with the extension ⬙.mp3⬙or ⬙.MP3⬙and WMA
files must always end with the extension ⬙.wma⬙or
⬙.WMA⬙. To prevent incorrect playback, do not use
these extensions for any other types of files.
•
For MP3 files, only version 1 ID3 tag data (such as
artist name, track title, album, etc.) are supported.
•
Any file that is copy protected (such as those down-
loaded from many online music stores) will not play.
The DVD player will automatically skip the file and
begin playing the next available file.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
Other compression formats such as AAC, MP3 Pro,
Ogg Vorbis, and ATRAC3 will not play. The DVD
player will automatically skip the file and begin play-
ing the next available file.
•
If you are creating your own files, the recommended
fixed bit rate for MP3 files is between 96 and 192Kbps
and the recommended fixed bit rate for WMA files is
between 64 and 192Kbps. Variable bit rates are also
supported. For both formats, the recommended
sample rate is either 44.1kHz or 48kHz.
•
To change the current file, use the remote control’s or
DVD player’s 䉱button to advance to the next file, or
the 䉲button to return to the start of the current or
previous file.
•
To change the current directory, use the remote con-
trol’s PROG Up and Down buttons.
Disc Errors
If the DVD player is unable to read the disc, a ⬙Disc Error⬙
message is displayed on the VES™ and Radio displays
and the disc is automatically ejected. A dirty, damaged, or
incompatible disc format are all potential causes for a
⬙Disc Error⬙message.
If a disc has a damaged track which results in audible or
visible errors that persists for 2.0 seconds, the DVD
player will attempt to continue playing the disc by
skipping forward 1.0 to 3.0 seconds at a time. If the end
of the disc is reached, the DVD player will return to the
beginning of the disc and attempt to play the start of the
first track.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
The DVD player may shut down during extremely hot
conditions, such as when the vehicle’s interior tempera-
ture is above 120°F. When this occurs, the DVD player
will display ⬙VES High Temp⬙and will shut off the VES™
displays until a safe temperature is reached. This shut-
down is necessary to protect the optics of the DVD
player.
Display
Other Language Setup
DVD Player Language Menu
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
All of the Language settings have a special ⬙Other⬙setting
to accommodate languages other than Japanese or Eng-
lish. These languages are selected using a special four-
digit code.
To enter a new language code, activate the DVD Setup
Menu. To enter DVD Setup Menu stop the DVD, enter
radio disc mode, then DVD setup and follow these
additional instructions:
•
Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but-
tons, highlight the Language item you want to edit,
and then press the remote control ENTER button.
•
Using the remote control Down cursor button, select
the ⬙Other⬙setting, then press the remote control’s
Right cursor button to begin editing the setting.
•
Using the remote control Up and Down cursor but-
tons, select a digit for the current position. After
selecting the digit, press the remote control’s Right
cursor button to select the next digit. Repeat this digit
selection sequence for all four digits.
•
When the entire four-digit code is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the language code
is not valid, the numbers all change back to ⬙*⬙.Ifthe
digits are visible after this step, then the language code
is valid.
Here is an abbreviated list of language codes. For more
language codes, please contact the dealer where the
vehicle was purchased.
Language Code Language Code
Dutch 2311 French 1517
German 1304 Italian 1819
Portuguese 2519 Spanish 1418
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Rating and Password Setup
The Rating and Password settings work together to control
the types of DVDs that your family watches. Most DVD-
Video discs have a rating (from 1 to 8) assigned to them
where lower numbers are designated for all audiences and
higher numbers are designated for more adult audiences.
When a DVD-Video disc is loaded, its rating is compared
to the setting in the DVD player. If the rating of the disc
is higher than the setting in the player, a Password screen
is displayed. In order to watch the disc, the rear passen-
ger must enter the correct password using the password
entry method described below.
To play all discs without requiring a password, set the
DVD player’s rating to Level 8. Setting the rating to Level
1 always requires the password to play any DVD disc.
Not all DVD discs encode a Rating, so it is still possible
that discs designed for adult audiences can still play
without requiring a password.
The default rating is Level 8 (play all discs without a
password) and the default password is 0000.
DVD Password Entry
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To set the password, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
follow these additional instructions:
•
Using the remote control Left and Right cursor but-
tons, select the Rating tab.
•
Highlight ⬙Change Password⬙, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button.
•
Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control Up and Down cursor buttons to set the
value for the current digit, and then press the remote
control’s Right cursor button to select the next digit.
Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four digits.
•
After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is
correct, the set password screen is displayed.
•
Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons to set the value for the current digit and the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select digits,
enter the new password.
•
After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
DVD Player Level Menu
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
To set the rating, activate the DVD Setup Menu and
follow these additional instructions:
•
Using the remote control’s Left and Right cursor
buttons, select the Rating tab.
•
Highlight ⬙Change Rating⬙, and then press the remote
control’s ENTER button.
•
Enter the current password. Select a digit, use the
remote control’s Up and Down cursor buttons to set
the value for the current digit, and then press the
remote control’s Right cursor button to select the next
digit. Repeat this digit selection sequence for all four
digits.
•
After the four-digit password is entered, press the
remote control’s ENTER button. If the password is
correct, the Rating Level menu is displayed.
•
Using the remote control’s Up and Down cursor
buttons, select the new rating level, and then press the
remote control’s ENTER button to accept the change.
Product Agreement
This product incorporates copyright protection technol-
ogy that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellec-
tual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home or other limited viewing uses other-
wise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse engineering or
disassembly is prohibited.
Dolby威Digital and MLP Lossless Manufactured
under license from Dolby Laboratories. ⬙Dolby⬙,
⬙MLP Lossless⬙, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
Copyright 1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories. All right re-
served.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
General Information
This system complies with Part 15 of the FCC Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches. The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch
will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
Remote Sound System Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
The button located in the center of the right hand control
will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio
source.
The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pressing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will SEEK down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left hand control
will tune to the next pre-set station that you have
programmed in the radio pre-set pushbuttons.
CD Player
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left hand switch changes
CDs on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This button
does not function for all other radios.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu-
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect™ (if equipped).
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel below the radio.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera-
ture. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked
or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera-
ture sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on
vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC), it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature
be manually controlled should the system not perform as
desired while in automatic mode. Both the outside tem-
perature display and ATC operation will return to nor-
mal when the snowplow is removed.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning System
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary
dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can
be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
1 – Front Blower 4 – DEFROST Mode
2 – Temperature Control 5 – Air Conditioning (A/C)
3 – MODE Control 6 – RECIRCULATION Control
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Front Blower Control
There are four blower speeds. Use this
control to regulate the amount of air
forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the OFF position.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the tem-
perature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the knob coun-
terclockwise, from top center into the
blue area of the scale, indicates cooler
temperatures. Rotating the knob clockwise, into the red
area, indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con-
denser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumu-
lation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Mode control allows you to choose
from several patterns of air distribu-
tion. You can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the symbols, or
a blend of two of these modes. The
closer the control is to a particular
mode, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Panel Mode
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow.
Bi-Level Mode
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any
conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor Mode
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount through the defrost and side window
demist outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort, while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost Mode
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode
with maximum blower and warm temperature settings
for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
MIX and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the
A/C button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to
help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use
these modes only when necessary.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Control
Press this button to choose between
outside air intake or recirculation of
the air inside the vehicle. A LED will
illuminate when you are in Recircula-
tion mode. Only use the Recirculation
mode to temporarily block out any
outside odors, smoke, or dust, and to
cool the interior rapidly upon initial start-up in very hot
or humid weather.
NOTE:
•
If the RECIRCULATION button is pressed when the
system is in Mix or Defrost mode the Recirculation
LED indicator will flash three times and then turn off
to indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.
•
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation
mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the outside air position.
•
The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-
ing the mode control selection by pressing the A/C
button.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control
airflow.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center
instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear
seat passengers.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Economy Mode
If ECONOMY mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.
Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired
temperature.
Air Conditioning Operation
Push this button to engage the Air
Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illu-
minate when the A/C system is
engaged.
MAX A/C
For maximum cooling, when MAX
A/C is selected the A/C is turned on
automatically and the air is recircu-
lated.
NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C
position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C
button is pushed.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
•
The Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) allows
both driver and front passenger seat occupants to
select individual comfort settings.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
•
When occupants in the vehicle select an Auto mode
operation, Auto blower operation is set by using rotary
knobs on the control unit and a comfort temperature
setting by using the temperature up and down but-
tons.
•
The system provides set-and-forget operation for op-
timum comfort and convenience.
•
The system can be controlled manually, if desired.
•
SYNC feature links the temperature controls, the pas-
senger side temperature becomes the same as the
temperature selected by the driver.
The ATC system automatically maintains the interior
comfort level desired by the driver and all passengers.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel
1 - Blower Control 9 - DEFROST
2 - Left Temperature Up 10 - Right Temperature Down
3 - SYNC Indicator 11 - A/C
4 - Left Temperature Indicator 12 - A/C Indicator
5 - Right Temperature
Indicator 13 - SYNC Temperature Button
6 - DELAY Indicator 14 - Left Temperature Down
7 - Right Temperature Up 15 - RECIRCULATE
8 - MODE
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Automatic Operation
1. Position the MODE control knob to the Auto position
on the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Position the BLOWER control knob in the Auto posi-
tion on the ATC Panel.
3. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and front
passenger temperature buttons. Once the desired tem-
perature is displayed, the system will achieve and auto-
matically maintain that comfort level.
4. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experience
the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings for
cold or hot vehicles. The system automatically adjusts
the temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
comfort as quickly as possible.
•
The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) — Customer-Programmable Features
(SETUP)” in this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low and the DELAY symbol will appear in the ATC
display until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode and
DELAY will no longer be illuminated in the display. The
blower will engage immediately if the Defrost mode is
selected, or by adjusting the blower control knob and
setting the fan to any fixed speed.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features.
NOTE: Each of these features operate independently
from each other. If any one feature is controlled manually,
the temperature doors will continue to operate automati-
cally.
There are six fixed blower speeds. Use
this control to regulate the amount of
air forced through the system in any
mode you select. The blower speed
increases as you move the control
clockwise from the OFF position.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control knob. The fan will now
operate at a fixed speed until additional speeds are
selected. This allows the front occupants to control the
volume of air circulated in the vehicle and cancel the
Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the following positions.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel.
Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the center outlets
and outboard outlets can be rotated to regulate or shut off
the airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor
outlets and defrost outlets.
NOTE: In many temperature positions, the BI-LEVEL
mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Blower Control
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of
air is directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions. It allows you to stay comfortable
while keeping the windshield clear.
Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
blower and temperature settings for best windshield and
side window defrosting.
NOTE: While operating in the other modes, the system
will not automatically sense the presence of fog, mist or
ice on the windshield. Defrost mode must be manually
selected to clear the windshield and side glass.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the air
conditioning system. When in A/C mode and the
ATC is set to a cool temperature, dehumidified air flows
through the air outlets. If Economy mode is desired, press
the A/C button to turn off the A/C mode in the ATC
display and deactivate the A/C system.
NOTE:
•
If the system is in Mix, Bi-Level or Defrost Mode, the
A/C can be turned off, but the A/C system shall
remain active to prevent fogging of the windows.
•
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Recirculation Control
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.
Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The
recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control
knob when this button is selected. Push the button a
second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and
allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
mode is not allowed in the Floor/Defrost Mix and
Defrost modes to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if these
modes are selected.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-
mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-
ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-
tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper
coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode
during Winter months is not recommended because it
may cause window fogging.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Vacation/Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in
fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging and Frosting
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in
mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost
on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation
mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may
occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause
odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the
water drains. In Winter months make sure the air intake
is clear of ice, slush and snow.
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵Starting Procedures .................... 375
▫Normal Starting ..................... 375
▫Automatic Transmission ............... 375
▫Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or ⫺29°C) ............... 376
▫If Engine Fails To Start ................ 376
▫After Starting ....................... 377
䡵Engine Block Heater — If Equipped ........ 377
䡵Automatic Transmission ................. 378
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock ............. 380
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . 380
▫Four–Speed Automatic Transmission
(3.7L Engine) — If Equipped ............ 380
▫Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(4.7L And 5.7L Engine) —
1500 Models Only .................... 390
▫Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine) — 2500 Models Only ........ 401
5
䡵Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped . . 411
▫Manually Shifted Transfer Case – If
Equipped .......................... 411
▫Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted
Transfer Case ....................... 414
▫Transfer Case Position Indicator Light ...... 415
▫Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped ....... 415
▫Shifting Procedure ................... 419
▫Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Five-Position Switch) – If Equipped ....... 422
▫Shifting Procedure ................... 426
䡵Axle Locker System (2500 Models Only) — If
Equipped ............................ 428
䡵Stabilizer/Sway Bar System — Power Wagon
Only ............................... 431
䡵Safe Off-Road Driving —
Power Wagon Only ..................... 433
▫Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle
Characteristics ...................... 433
▫Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand ......... 435
▫Crossing Obstacles
(Rocks And Other High Points) .......... 437
▫Hill Climbing ....................... 439
▫Driving Through Water ................ 442
▫Airing Down For Off-Road Driving ....... 444
▫Vehicle Recovery ..................... 445
▫After Driving Off-Road ................ 449
䡵Limited-Slip Differential ................. 450
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵Driving On Slippery Surfaces ............. 451
▫Acceleration ........................ 451
▫Traction ........................... 452
䡵Driving Through Water ................. 452
▫Flowing/Rising Water ................. 452
▫Shallow Standing Water ............... 453
䡵Off-Road Driving Tips .................. 454
▫After Driving Off-Road ................ 455
䡵Winch Usage (Power Wagon Only) — If
Equipped ............................ 456
▫Things To Know Before Using Your Winch . . 456
▫Understanding The Features
Of Your Winch ...................... 458
▫Winch Accessories .................... 460
▫Operating Your Winch ................. 461
▫Rigging Techniques ................... 474
䡵Power Steering ....................... 476
▫Power Steering Fluid Check ............. 477
䡵Multi-Displacement System (MDS)
(If Equipped) — 5.7L Engine Only .......... 478
䡵Parking Brake ........................ 478
䡵Brake System ........................ 480
▫3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only ....... 480
䡵Electronic Brake Control System ........... 481
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 481
▫Traction Control System (TCS) –
If Equipped ........................ 481
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped . . . 482
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
▫Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped ...... 483
▫Electronic Stability Control (ESC) – If
Equipped .......................... 486
▫ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC Off Indicator Light ............ 490
▫Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped . . . 491
䡵Tire Safety Information ................. 492
▫Tire Markings ....................... 492
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN) ......... 496
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions ......... 497
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure .......... 498
䡵Tires — General Information ............. 502
▫Tire Pressure ....................... 502
▫Tire Inflation Pressures ................ 503
▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 505
▫Radial Ply Tires ..................... 505
▫Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped .............. 506
▫Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped ........ 506
▫Full Size Spare – If Equipped ............ 507
▫Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped ......... 507
▫Tire Spinning ....................... 508
▫Tread Wear Indicators ................. 509
▫Life Of Tire ........................ 509
▫Replacement Tires .................... 510
䡵Supplemental Tire Pressure Information — If
Equipped ............................ 511
䡵Tire Chains .......................... 512
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵Snow Tires .......................... 514
䡵Tire Rotation Recommendations ........... 515
▫Directional Tires – If Equipped ........... 516
▫Dual Rear Wheels – If Equipped ......... 516
䡵Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ....... 517
▫Base System ........................ 520
▫Premium System – If Equipped .......... 522
▫Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Tire
Light Load Inflation Switch Description
(2500 Models) – If Equipped ............ 526
▫General Information .................. 530
䡵Fuel Requirements ..................... 531
▫3.7L And 4.7L Engine ................. 531
▫5.7L Engine ........................ 531
▫Reformulated Gasoline ................ 532
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ............. 532
▫E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...... 532
▫MMT In Gasoline .................... 533
▫Materials Added To Fuel ............... 534
▫Fuel System Cautions ................. 534
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings ............ 535
䡵Flexible Fuel (4.7L Engine Only) —
If Equipped .......................... 536
▫E-85 General Information ............... 536
▫Ethanol Fuel (E-85) ................... 537
▫Fuel Requirements ................... 537
▫Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles ...... 538
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
▫Starting ........................... 538
▫Cruising Range ...................... 539
▫Replacement Parts ................... 539
▫Maintenance ........................ 539
䡵Adding Fuel ......................... 540
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 541
䡵Vehicle Loading ...................... 541
▫Certification Label ................... 541
䡵Trailer Towing ........................ 544
▫Common Towing Definitions ............ 544
▫Trailer Hitch Classification .............. 548
▫Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) ........ 549
▫Trailer And Tongue Weight ............. 553
▫Towing Requirements ................. 554
▫Towing Tips ........................ 564
䡵Snowplow .......................... 566
▫1500 Models Only .................... 566
▫2500/3500 Models Only ................ 566
䡵Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) ................ 570
▫Towing This Vehicle
Behind Another Vehicle ................ 570
▫Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive
Models ........................... 571
▫Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive
Models ........................... 572
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.
The starter should not be operated for more than 15-
second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such
intervals will protect the starter from overheating.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
children in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should be warned
not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the
shift lever. Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle. A
child could operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is
obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal. Turn the key fob to the START position and release
when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within
10 seconds, turn the key fob to the OFF position, wait five
seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
Start the engine with the shift lever in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position. Apply the brake before shifting into any
driving range.
NOTE: This vehicle is equipped with a transmission
shift interlocking system. The brake pedal must be
pressed to shift out of PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch
briefly to the START position and release it. The starter
motor will continue to run but will automatically disen-
gage when the engine is running.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there while cranking the engine. This should clear any
excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
WARNING!
•
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
•
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle.
(Continued)
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-
cies” for further information.
If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not
have enough power to continue running when the key
fob is released. If this occurs, continue cranking with the
accelerator pedal pushed all the way to the floor. Release
the accelerator pedal and the key fob once the engine is
running smoothly.
If the engine shows no sign of starting after two 15-
second periods of cranking with the accelerator pedal
held to the floor, the “Normal Starting” procedure should
be repeated.
After Starting
The idle speed is automatically controlled and will de-
crease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
1500 Models
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp
assembly. It is located between the front grill and the
radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.
2500/3500 Models
The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille
by the right front tow hook.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered
strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not
in use for the winter months. During winter months,
remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on
the c-clip.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
•
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
•
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be seriously or fatally injured. Children
should be warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the shift lever. Do not leave the key
fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and once removed the shift lever is locked in PARK.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position unless the brakes are applied. To move
the shift lever out of the PARK position, the ignition
switch must be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine
running or not) and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Four–Speed Automatic Transmission
(3.7L Engine) — If Equipped
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The
shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the
steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if
equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the
shift lever out of the PARK position (refer to “Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To
drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to
the DRIVE position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of
PARK (column shift only).
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual down-
shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (described later in this section). Press-
ing the ERS (-/+) switches (column shift) or moving the
shift lever to the left or right (-/+) (console shift) while in
the DRIVE position will select the highest available
transmission gear, and will display that gear in the
instrument cluster as 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever clockwise without first pull-
ing it toward you (column shift), or rearward with
the brake pedal released (floor shift), after you
have placed it in PARK. Make sure the transmis-
sion is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted
shift lever toward you and move it all the way
counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted
shifter, move the shift lever all the way forward and to
the left until it stops.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
•
Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
•
Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
•
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” and “Towing a
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) feature (described below) to select a lower
gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear
range will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until
the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of the torque
converter clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid
is warm (refer to the “Note” under “Torque Converter
Clutch” in this section). During extremely cold tempera-
tures (-20°F [-29°C] or below), operation may briefly be
limited to second gear only. Normal operation will re-
sume once the transmission temperature has risen to a
suitable level.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in second gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gear normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the shift
lever to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-) switch
(column shift) will activate ERS mode, display the cur-
rent gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear
as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping the
shift lever to the left (-) or right (+) (console shift) or the
ERS (-) or (+) switch (column shift) will change the top
available gear.
Column Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
the right (+) (console shift) or the ERS (+) switch (column
shift) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift lever
position indicator in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
Screen Display 1234D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-4
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), tap the shift lever to the
left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-) switch down (column
shift) repeatedly as the vehicle slows. The transmission
will shift to the range from which the vehicle can best be
slowed down.
Console Shift Lever
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fourth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if the follow-
ing conditions are present:
•
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
•
the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature,
•
the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an ad-
equate temperature,
•
vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
•
the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated;
When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, the transmission will downshift into third gear.
NOTE: TOW/HAUL mode locks out Overdrive.
TOW/HAUL Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine
is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE: The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm
[usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
Because the engine speed is higher when the torque
converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the
transmission is not shifting into Overdrive when cold.
This is normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS)
feature, when the transmission is sufficiently warm, will
demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift into and
out of Overdrive.
Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(4.7L And 5.7L Engine) — 1500 Models Only
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The
shift lever is mounted either on the right side of the
steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if
equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the
shift lever out of the PARK position (refer to “Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To
drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to
the DRIVE position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of
PARK (column shift only).
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only Park, Reverse,
Neutral, and Drive shift positions. Manual downshifts
can be made using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift
control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS)” in this
section). Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (column shift)
or moving the shift lever to the left or right (-/+) (console
shift) while in the DRIVE position will select the highest
available transmission gear, and will display that gear in
the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever clockwise without first pull-
ing it toward you (column shift), or rearward with
the brake pedal released (floor shift), after you
have placed it in PARK. Make sure the transmis-
sion is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted
shift lever toward you and move it all the way
counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted
shifter, move the shift lever all the way forward and to
the left until it stops.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
•
Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
•
Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
•
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
This range is for when the vehicle is standing for pro-
longed periods with the engine running. The engine may
be started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recre-
ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first and sec-
ond gears, direct third gear and overdrive fourth and
fifth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-
ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
To access all six available gears, you must use the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature, described below.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) feature (refer to “Electronic Range Select
(ERS)” in this section) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until
the transmission cools down.
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this
excess heat generation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the
torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in third gear regardless of which forward gear is selected.
PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to oper-
ate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to
an authorized dealer for service without damaging the
transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gear normally.
Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an
additional underdrive gear which is not normally used
during through-gear accelerations. This additional gear
can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability
when towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode,
gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct
drive. ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears) are the same as the
normal fourth and fifth gears.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)
switch (column shift) or the shift lever to the left (-)
(console shift) will activate ERS mode, display the current
gear in the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as
the top available gear. For example, if you are in DRIVE
and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap the shift
lever/switch one time in the (-) direction, the display will
show 4 (ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap down (-) will
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
shift the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added under-
drive gear). Once in ERS mode, tapping ERS (-) or (+) will
change the top available gear.
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the shift lever to
the right (+) (console shift) or the ERS (+) switch (column
shift) until “D” is once again displayed in the shift lever
position indicator in the instrument cluster.
Column Shift Lever
Console Shift Lever
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing and accident
or personal injury.
Screen Display 123456D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3 1, 2,
4
1, 2,
4, 5
1, 2,
4–6
1-5
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
shift lever to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-)
switch down (column shift). The transmission will shift
to the range from which the vehicle can best be slowed
down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The trans-
mission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if
the following conditions are present:
•
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
•
the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature,
•
the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an ad-
equate temperature,
•
vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
•
the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the trans-
mission will automatically downshift (for engine brak-
ing) during steady braking maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine
is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
•
The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,
until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are
TOW/HAUL Switch
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of
driving]. Because top gear is disabled, and the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature, when the trans-
mission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
•
If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con-
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.
Six–Speed Automatic Transmission
(5.7L Engine) — 2500 Models Only
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The
shift lever is mounted on the right side of the steering
column. You must press the brake pedal to move the shift
lever out of the PARK position (refer to “Brake/
Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). To
drive, move the shift lever from PARK or NEUTRAL to
the DRIVE position. Pull the shift lever toward you when
shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of
PARK.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has only PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual down-
shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select
(ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select
(ERS)” in this section). Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches on
the shift lever while in the DRIVE position will select the
highest available transmission gear, and will display that
gear in the instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while vehicle is in motion.
Apply the parking brake when leaving vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in the PARK position first, and then apply the
parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precau-
tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever clockwise without first pull-
ing it toward you after you have placed it in PARK.
Make sure the transmission is in PARK before
leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK
or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate quickly
forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something. Only shift
into gear when the engine is idling normally and
when your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the key fob. Once the key fob is
removed, the shift lever is locked in the PARK
position, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement. Furthermore, you should never leave
unattended children inside a vehicle.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key
fob in the vehicle. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
•
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
this can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
•
When shifting into PARK, pull the shift lever toward
you and move it all the way counterclockwise until it
stops.
•
Release the shift lever and make sure it is fully seated
in the PARK gate.
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
•
With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle rearward. Use this
range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can result
in severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recre-
ational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and
“Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and
sixth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-
ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the Electronic Range
Select (ERS) feature (refer to “Electronic Range Select
(ERS)” in this section) to select a lower gear range. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear range will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission operating temperature exceeds normal
operating limits, the powertrain controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Trans-
mission Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and
the transmission may downshift out of Overdrive until
the transmission cools down.
NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded
vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep
grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In
these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a
significant additional heat load on the cooling system.
Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible
gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL
(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this
excess heat generation.
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-
proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the
torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are
inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the
“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or
below), operation may briefly be limited to first and
direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation
The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the
driver to limit the highest available gear when the shift
lever is in the DRIVE position. For example, if you shift
the transmission into 3 (third gear), the transmission will
never shift above third gear, but will shift down into
second and first gear normally.
You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any
vehicle speed. When the shift lever is in the DRIVE
position, the transmission will operate automatically,
shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)
switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in
the instrument cluster, and maintain that gear as the top
available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping ERS (-) or (+)
will change the top available gear.
Column Shift Lever
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
To exit ERS mode, simply press and hold the ERS (+)
switch until “D” is once again displayed in the shift lever
position indicator in the instrument cluster.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
Screen Display 123456D
Actual Gear(s)
Allowed
1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-6
NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum
deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the
ERS (-) switch down. The transmission will shift to the
range from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The trans-
mission will automatically shift into the Overdrive gear if
the following conditions are present:
•
the shift lever is in the DRIVE position,
•
the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature,
•
the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an ad-
equate temperature,
•
vehicle speed is sufficiently high, and
•
the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.
When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode
When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a
heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-
curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to select TOW/
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce
the potential for transmission overheating or failure due
to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL
mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the trans-
mission will automatically downshift (for engine brak-
ing) during steady braking maneuvers.
The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode
has been activated. Pressing the switch a second time
restores normal operation. If the TOW/HAUL mode is
desired, the switch must be pressed each time the engine
is started.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
•
The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the
transmission will not shift to sixth gear, until the
TOW/HAUL Switch
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usu-
ally after 1 to 3 miles (1.6 to 4.8 km) of driving].
Because sixth gear is disabled, and engine speed is
higher when the torque converter clutch is not en-
gaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not
shifting properly when cold. This is normal. Using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature, when the trans-
mission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate that the
transmission is able to shift into and out of Overdrive.
•
If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the
first few seconds of operation after shifting the trans-
mission into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the
fluid partially draining from the torque converter into
the transmission. This condition is normal and will not
cause damage to the transmission. The torque con-
verter will refill within five seconds after starting the
engine.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a
manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted
transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your
transfer case, located in this section for further informa-
tion.
Manually Shifted Transfer Case – If Equipped
The transfer case provides four mode positions.
•
Two-wheel drive high range (2H)
•
Four-wheel drive high range (4H)
•
Neutral (N)
•
Four-wheel drive low range (4L)
This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H
position for normal street and highway conditions such
as dry, hard surfaced roads.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L
positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive-
shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply
moving the shift lever to the desired positions. The 4H
and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on dry,
hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear and
damage to the driveline components.
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is
in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear drive-
shafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when
the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L
position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL
positions.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is
approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions
at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the
engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and
can cause damage to the drivetrain.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The transfer case is not
equipped with a synchronizer and therefore the front and
rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for the shift to take
place. Shifting while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire
pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera-
tures.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2H
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range - This range locks the
front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N
Neutral - This range disengages the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer
Case
2H ⇔4H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the
vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,
shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera-
tor pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant
force when shifting the transfer case lever.
2H Or 4H ⇔4L
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer
case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in
transfer case NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
•
Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission may require
shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while
completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL, hold foot on brake, and
turn the engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.
•
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due
to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L
with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h).
•
Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the
transmission is in gear.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Light
The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front
axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Four-Position Switch) – If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides four
mode positions:
•
Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
•
Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
•
Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
•
Neutral (NEUTRAL)
Transfer Case Switch (Four-Position)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced
roads.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together, forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this
section for specific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK
and 4WD LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD
LOW positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause
increased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo-
nents.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by pressing the recessed button located on the lower left
hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer case
NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing
only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and
4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate
the current and desired transfer case selection. When you
select a different transfer case position, the indicator
lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙for your transfer
case, located in this section.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause
damage to driveline components.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or
4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care
not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range provides
additional traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. It locks the front and rear
driveshafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
•
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
position will remain ON and the newly selected posi-
tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the
requirements for the selected position have been met.
To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
original position, make certain all shift requirements
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift again.
•
If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
2WD⇔4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn-
ing the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the
ignition switch must be in the ON position with the
engine either running or off. This shift cannot be com-
pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow
shifts between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear
wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the
selected position indicator light will flash and the origi-
nal position indicator light will remain ON. At this time,
reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete
the shift.
2WD Or 4WD LOCK⇔4WD LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use
either of the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
•
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the
shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash
continuously while the original position indicator light
is ON, until all requirements have been met.
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, the shift will not take place and no position
indicator lights will be on or flashing.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case
(Five-Position Switch) – If Equipped
This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by
the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is
located on the instrument panel.
This electronically shifted transfer case provides five
mode positions:
•
Two-wheel drive high range (2WD)
•
Four-wheel drive automatic range (4WD AUTO)
•
Four-wheel drive lock range (4WD LOCK)
•
Four-wheel drive low range (4WD LOW)
•
Neutral (NEUTRAL)
This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be
driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and
highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving
the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy
benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode
can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but
the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel
Transfer Case Switch (Five–Position)
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle
senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is en-
gaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than
the 2WD mode.
When additional traction is required, the transfer case
4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to lock
the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front
and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is
accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the
desired position. Refer to “Shifting Procedure” for spe-
cific shifting instructions. The 4WD LOCK and 4WD
LOW positions are designed for loose, slippery road
surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW
positions on dry hard surfaced roads may cause in-
creased tire wear and damage to the driveline compo-
nents.
NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL position is selected
by depressing the recessed button located on the lower
left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch. The transfer
case NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational
towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
and Operating” for further information.
Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights
The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD,
4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located on the instrument
cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case
selection. When you select a different transfer case posi-
tion, the position indicator lights will do the following:
If All Shift Conditions Are Met:
1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.
2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the
transfer case completes the shift.
3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the
selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
If One Or More Shift Conditions Are Not Met:
1. The indicator light for the current position will remain
ON.
2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-
tinue to flash.
3. The transfer case will not shift.
NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all
the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer
case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn
the control knob back to the current position, wait five
seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-
ments, refer to the ⬙Shifting Procedure⬙for your transfer
case, located in this section of the owner’s manual.
The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic
shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on
after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it
means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-
ing properly and that service is required.
WARNING!
Always engage the parking brake when powering
down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is
illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may
allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal
injury.
NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause
damage to driveline components.
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine
speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD
AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed
25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends
on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each
wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the
drivetrain.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,
there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping
speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move
regardless of the transmission position. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
For additional information on the appropriate use of each
transfer case mode position, see the information below:
2WD
Rear-Wheel Drive High Range - This range is for normal
street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced roads.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
4WD AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto Range - This range sends power
to the rear wheels. The four–wheel drive system will be
automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road conditions.
4WD LOCK
Four-Wheel Drive Lock Range - This range locks the front
and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
4WD LOW
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range - This range provides low
speed four-wheel drive. Locks the front and rear drive-
shafts together forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate
at the same speed. Additional traction and maximum
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do
not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
N
Neutral - This range disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat
towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Shifting Procedure
NOTE:
•
If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have not been met, the transfer case will not
shift. The position indicator light for the previous
position will remain ON, and the newly selected
position indicator light will continue to flash until all
the requirements for the selected position have been
met. To retry a shift: return the control knob back to the
original position, make certain all shift requirements
have been met, wait five seconds and try the shift
again.
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
If all the requirements to select a new transfer case
position have been met, the current position indicator
light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light
will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.
When the shift is complete, the position indicator light
for the selected position will stop flashing and remain
ON.
2WD ⇔4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK
Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.
Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK
can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With
the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/
disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera-
tor pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is
stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position
with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot
be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.
2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK ⇔4WD
LOW
NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some
gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not
detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.
Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of
the following procedures:
Preferred Procedure
1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control
switch to the desired position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Alternate Procedure
1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.
2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the
engine either OFF or running, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL.
3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired
position.
4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not
flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.
NOTE:
•
If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate
Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift
or if they no longer are being met while the shift
attempt is in process, the desired position indicator
light will flash continuously while the original posi-
tion indicator light is ON, until all requirements have
been met.
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a
shift to take place and for the position indicator lights
to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON
position, then the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM (2500 MODELS ONLY) —
IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front
and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged,
mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the
wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to
maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming
stuck. The locking front and rear differentials should only
be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situa-
tions where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with
the ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle
with the differentials locked on pavement due to the
reduced ability to turn and speed limitations.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced
roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced
and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the
axles are locked on hard surfaced roads.
•
Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is
stuck and the tires are spinning. You can damage
drivetrain components. Lock the rear axle before
attempting situations or navigating terrain, which
could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.
The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch.
The switch has three positions, AXLE UNLOCK, REAR
LOCK, and FRONT/REAR LOCK. Under normal driv-
ing conditions, the switch should be left in the AXLE
UNLOCK position. In the AXLE UNLOCK position, the
front and rear axles are unlocked. In the REAR LOCK
position, the rear axle is locked. In the FRONT/REAR
LOCK position, the front and rear axles are locked.
NOTE: Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK
position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still
provides torque biasing capability for moderate low
traction environments.
During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light
will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command
has been successfully executed, the light will remain on
solid.
To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to
“Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting and Operat-
ing” for further information. Move the axle locker switch
position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The RR indicator light will remain on when the
rear axle is locked.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be
necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator
light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR
LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the ve-
hicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking
action.
WARNING!
Do not use the locked axle position for normal
driving. A locked front axle is intended for off-road
driving only. Locking the front axle during on-road
driving will reduce the steering ability. This could
cause a collision and you may be seriously injured.
To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to
FRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph
(5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the front
axle is locked.
NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front
axle will lock.
To unlock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to
REAR LOCK. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light
will go out when the axle is unlocked.
NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to
side to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while
turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right
hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance
may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the
axles.
To unlock the rear axle; move the axle locker switch to
AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go
out when the rear axle is unlocked.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER
WAGON ONLY
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting
stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front
suspension travel in off-road situations.
Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an
increased ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm)
in the front and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major
advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect
it has on approach/departure and break over angles.
This system is controlled by the electronic control sway
bar switch located on the instrument panel.
The switch has two positions; On-Road and Off-Road.
The system is normally in the On-Road mode, indicated
by a solid green light. The stabilizer/sway bar should
remain in the On-Road mode during normal driving
conditions.
1 — On Road
2 — Off Road
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
WARNING!
Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on
hard surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h), you may lose control of the vehicle, which
could result in serious injury. The front stabilizer bar
enhances vehicle stability and is necessary for main-
taining control of the vehicle. The system monitors
vehicle speed and will attempt to reconnect the
stabilizer bar at speeds over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is
indicated by a flashing off road light and solid on
road light. Once vehicle speed is reduced below
14 mph (22 km/h), the system will attempt to return to
the Off-Road mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI
or 4LO as shown in “Four Wheel Drive Operation” and
press the top of the stabilizer/sway bar button to obtain
the Off-Road position. The amber indicator light will
flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been fully discon-
nected.
NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differences. This
condition is due to driving surface differences or vehicle
loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to
disconnect/reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked from side
to side.
To return to the On-Road mode; press the bottom of the
stabilizer/sway bar button.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road
mode, vehicle stability is greatly reduced. Do not
attempt to drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss
of control of the vehicle, which could result in
serious injury. Contact your local service center for
assistance.
SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON
ONLY
Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics
Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities.
These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore
those wilderness trails where few travel, providing a
source of exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you
venture out, you should contact your local governmental
agency to determine the designated off-road vehicle
(ORV) trails or recreation areas. You should always tread
lightly and only use established roads, trails or ORV
recreational areas. The National Forest Service, Bureau of
Land Management or local Department of Natural Re-
sources are a wealth of information and usually have
maps with marked trails.
Skid Plates And Underbody Protection
Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components
of the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and
steering damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped
with boxed cross members and fore/aft rails. This addi-
tional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in
severe off-road situations that would be considered im-
passable by a normal truck.
Ramp Travel Index (RTI)
The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you
can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree
ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the
vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle
has an RTI of 655, which means you can articulate one
front wheel 32 inches in the air while the other three
wheels remain in contact with the ground.
Water Fording Characteristics
Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability to cross
a body of still water, where the powertrain and drivetrain
are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has high water
fording characteristics with the ability to cross a pool of
water, without stopping, 24 inches deep at a maximum
speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of water 30 inches
deep at a maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h), both with
an entrance ramp angle of 1.3 degrees.
CAUTION!
The door sill height is 25 inches. Water may intrude
into the interior of the vehicle at greater depths.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the simultane-
ous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving).
When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,
using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the
vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also
used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a
steep incline.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-
road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Control-
ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what isn’t. When on a trail you should always be
looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
When To Use Low Range
When driving off-road, shift into 4L (Low Range) for
additional traction or to improve handling and control on
slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low
range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power
range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and
down hills, with improved control and less effort. Also,
use 4L (Low Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get
heavy loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4H
(High Range) traction will not do the job.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
•
Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and
traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a
low gear and shift the transfer case to 4L (Low Range)
if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than neces-
sary to maintain headway. Over-revving the engine
can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If you
start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering wheel
no more than a
1
⁄
4
turn quickly back and forth, while
still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get a
fresh ⬙bite⬙and help maintain your momentum.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brak-
ing may cause skidding and loss of control.
•
Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get through.
You should use 4L (Low Range) with a gear low
enough to maintain your momentum without shifting.
If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering
wheel no more than a
1
⁄
4
turn quickly back and forth
for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are
normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting
stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud
hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are
any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely
recovered if stuck.
•
Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through
with full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots
in a trail maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do
not stop. The key to driving in soft sand using the
appropriate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoid-
ing abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s
momentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft
sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a
minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically
improve your traction and handling, while driving on
the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal
air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back
up prior to reducing the pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-
vers.
Crossing Obstacles
(Rocks And Other High Points)
While driving off road, you will encounter many types of
terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different
types of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path
ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability
to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the
vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle
forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the
throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and
ease the vehicle up and over the object.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system
loading which could cause you to loose control of
your vehicle.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle
or determine the correct path. Determining the correct
path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting
many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you
over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see
the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and
guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path which
ensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This
will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of
the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make
every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.
CAUTION!
•
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large
enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.
•
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large
enough to contact the door sills.
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large
rut, the angled approach is the key to maintaining your
vehicle’s mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-
degree angle and let each tire go through the obstacle
independently. You need to use caution when crossing
large obstacles with steep sides. Do not attempt to cross
any large obstacle with steep sides at an angle great
enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get
caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed
dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created.
You should now be able to drive out following the trench
you just created at a 45-degree angle.
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing
an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approxi-
mately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be
on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the
log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and
accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your
tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter
than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will
become high centered.
Getting High Centered
If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out
of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is
hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and
what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depend-
ing on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up
and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off
of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can
also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off
the object.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects
increases the risk of underbody damage.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
•
Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a
hill consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is
too steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill
side trail. Is the trail straight up and down? What is on
top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches
or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover
the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything
looks good and you feel confident, then change trans-
mission into a lower gear, shift the transfer case into 4L
(Low) and proceed with caution. You should use first
gear and 4L (Low Range) for very steep hills.
•
Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your
ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropri-
ate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle
and apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not
race forward into a steep grade, the abrupt change of
grade could cause you to lose control. If the front end
begins to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring
all four tires back on the ground. As you approach the
crest of the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed
over the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach
the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain
headway by turning the steering wheel no more than
a
1
⁄
4
turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a
fresh ⬙bite⬙into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not
make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a roll over, which may result in
severe injury.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill
you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe
descent. What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
steep to maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there
obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of
distance at the base of the hill to regain control if the
vehicle descends too fast? If you feel confident in your
ability to proceed then make sure you are in 4L (Low
Range) with the transmission in first gear (manually
select first gear on automatic transmissions) and pro-
ceed with caution. Allow engine braking to control the
descent and apply your brakes if necessary, but do not
allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured.
•
Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid
driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your
vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places
more weight on the down hill wheels, which increases
the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make
sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable
soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle
heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover, which may result in severe injury.
•
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall
or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill,
allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately
apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into
REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the
compression braking of the engine and transmission to
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to
control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid
locking or skidding the tires.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEU-
TRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive
diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or
down.
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only
be attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible
manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know
your vehicle’s abilities and be able to recover it if
something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls do not
attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested water
first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You want
to use first gear in 4L (Low Range) and proceed very
slowly with a constant slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h]
maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving;
do not try to accelerate through the crossing. After
crossing any water higher than the bottom of the axle
differentials, you should inspect all of the vehicle fluids
for signs of water ingestion.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer
case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive
too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
vehicle components and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy
•
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you
approach any type of water you need to determine if
you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get
out and walk through the water or probe it with a
stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or
muddy waters, check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife and you can
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe
crossing is the water depth, current and bottom con-
ditions. On soft bottoms the vehicle will sink in,
effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be
sure to consider this when determining the depth and
the ability to safely cross.
•
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other
standing water areas normally contain murky or
muddy waters. These water types normally contain
hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom
condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where
you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This
makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery.
If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than
proceed using the low and slow method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec-
tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
•
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other
Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely
dangerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running
stream or river even in shallow water. Fast moving
water can easily push your vehicle downstream
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow water,
a high current can still wash the dirt out from around
your tires putting you and your vehicle in jeopardy.
There is still a high risk of personal injury and vehicle
damage with slower water currents in depths greater
than the vehicle’s running ground clearance. You
should never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clearance.
Even the slowest current can push the heaviest vehicle
downstream out of control if the water is deep enough
to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s body.
Before you proceed determine the speed of the current,
the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom condition
and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle
heading slightly upstream using the low and slow
technique.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can
push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of
control. This could put you and your passengers at
risk of injury or drowning.
Airing Down For Off-Road Driving
Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your
ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air
pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its
surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or
form to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and
vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like
rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than
softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
need to experiment to determine what is right for your
situation. It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to
replace it so, start high and lower it as required. Remem-
ber you must return the tires to normal air pressure
before driving on road or at highway conditions. Be sure
you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road
air pressure.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam-
age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air
pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at
a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Vehicle Recovery
If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation
where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle
recovery should always be given consideration before
attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never go
off-road driving without the ability to recover your
vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with
you usually works best for most situations. The first
thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?
Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go
forward or to go backward? Can you still move the
vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to? Are you
alone or do you have another vehicle to help? Is there
high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process?
Answering these questions will help you determine the
best method of recovery. If you can still move the vehicle
slightly and the only issue is slick ground, then rock
cycling your vehicle would be the first choice. If you have
ample room, an additional vehicle and there is low risk of
vehicle impingement on the surroundings, then using a
tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and
easy. If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation
where great care needs to be taken during the recovery,
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
then nothing can do the job better than a winch. If you are
severely hung up on something you should jack the
vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to
allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing
further damage. This should be tried before attempting
any recovery method.
CAUTION!
Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first
clearing the object, may result in additional under-
body damage.
•
Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your ve-
hicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly
used methods. This simply involves shifting your
vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying
throttle after each shift. During this process, for addi-
tional traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly
back and forth no more than a
1
⁄
4
turn. If you are stuck
in mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during
this process to clean the debris from the tread and
improve the traction. You want to create a rocking
motion with the vehicle. This helps build vehicle
momentum, which hopefully gets you out. Remember
to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the
shift. If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free,
stop and try another method of recovery. Continuous
rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to
your vehicle and the environment.
CAUTION!
Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an
excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster
than an indicated 35 mph (56 km/h).
•
Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap –Tow
straps are a quick and easy way to recover your
vehicle from minor situations if you have a secondary
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle which is not stuck. The tow hooks on your
vehicle are designed to take the abusive force gener-
ated during vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper
or any other vehicle component as an attachment
point. Using tow straps requires coordination between
the two drivers. Good communication and line of sight
are required for a safe recovery. First connect the tow
strap to the correct attachment points on both vehicles.
There should be a least 20 to 30 feet between the
vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary join
two tow straps together using a 1
1
⁄
2
inch hard wood
dowel. This will keep the straps from becoming knot-
ted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap
breaks. Next have the tow vehicle backup, leaving two
to three feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow
vehicle, using light throttle, should accelerate tighten-
ing the strap providing the pulling force needed to free
the vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should assist
in the recovery, at the time of the snap, by slowly
spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling
vehicle. After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of
the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free
and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles.
The driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the
throttle without using the brakes, once signaled by the
other driver. This sequence is important to avoid
having the recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two
straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects
could become projectiles if a strap breaks, which
could cause severe injury. Never leave more than two
or three feet of slack in the strap. More slack than this
greatly increases the risk of injury and vehicle dam-
age. Always keep everyone at least 30 feet away from
a strapping or winching situation.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
•
Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For Addi-
tional Information) – Winching is most commonly
used in the following situations: there is no support
vehicle available, a high controlled force is required to
recover the vehicle, there is a high risk of environmen-
tal or vehicle damage, or where nothing else seems to
work. A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a
great deal of control. It allows you to walk the vehicle
out of the situation in a slow controlled manner. This
control works well for avoiding further vehicle dam-
age. Once you decide it is time to use the winch look
for a good anchor point. It needs to be strong enough
to hold more than the vehicle’s weight and provide a
direction of pull as straight as possible. Use block and
tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or
increase the winch’s pulling force. If the anchor point
is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable
to the strap. If it is another vehicle, then place that
vehicle in PARK and block the front tires. If you cannot
find an anchor point within reach try using your spare
tire by burying it. Once you have determined an
anchor point hook up the cable, ensuring there are a
least five wraps of cable left on the drum, and place a
floor mat or something else over the strung out cable.
Placing something over the strung out cable helps
keep the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next, place
the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle
as you power the winch in. Be careful not to allow
slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do not try
to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to bunch
up on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable
afterwards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and
always stand back while winching.
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Winch cables are under high tension when in use and
can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over
or straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload
the winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle
while winching. Failure to follow these instructions
can result in serious or fatal injury.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
•
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
The limited-slip differential provides additional traction
on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when
there is a difference between the traction characteristics
of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During
normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit per-
forms similarly to a conventional differential. On slip-
pery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of
the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better
traction.
The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during
slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator
will supply maximum traction. When starting with only
one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight
momentary application of the parking brake may be
necessary to gain maximum traction.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential
never run the engine with one rear wheel off the
ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear
wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when
both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could
cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to
slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a
turn.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the rear (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-
tions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
CAUTION!
•
Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•
Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing wa-
ter.
•
Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Driving through standing water may cause dam-
age to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Al-
ways inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not con-
tinue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further dam-
age. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
WARNING!
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•
Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stop-
ping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•
Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
•
Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep
hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural
obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,
choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.
Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and
cautiously.
If you must back down a hill, back straight down using
REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago-
nally across the hill.
When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,
shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator
slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
•
Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
•
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
•
Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-
pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
•
Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and
propeller shafts.
•
After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
•
If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
correct the situation.
WINCH USAGE (POWER WAGON ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
Things To Know Before Using Your Winch
General Winch Information
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery
winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the
vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds
wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduc-
tion. By nature, a winch is capable of generating very
high forces and should be used with care. Do not operate
the winch without reading and understanding the com-
plete winch owner’s manual.
Tensioning The Wire Rope
The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.
Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:
1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on
the winch drum.
2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.
CAUTION!
Be certain the anchor will withstand the load re-
quired to tension the wire rope.
3. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 kg) of tension to the rope
while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the
rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is
neatly wound onto the drum.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the
direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the
winch.
Low Voltage Interrupt
Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt
winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage
drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out
for 30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is
tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a
few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to
recover before continuing to winch.
Winch Motor Thermal Protection
Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device
in the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive
duration, the device may interrupt motor function to
protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will
power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor
to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The
winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Understanding The Features Of Your Winch
Winch Components
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle
charging system and features a thermal protection switch
that automatically stops motor function in the power-in
direction if the motor gets too hot.
2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remote
control to be attached to the control pack to allow the
winch to function.
3. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum
allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and
transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is equipped
with an integral brake that will stop rotation of the winch
drum if the winch motor is stopped.
4. 3-Stage Planetary Gear Set: Provides balance between
speed and pulling power.
5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be
connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.
6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum
to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the
wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.
7. Remote Control: The remote control provides the
interface between the winch operator and the winch. The
remote control provides the ability to power the winch in,
out, and stop the winch. To operate the winch, the toggle
switch is pressed down to power the winch in and up to
power the winch out. The winch will stop if the switch is
left in the neutral (center) position.
CAUTION!
If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the
hook.
Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope
and minimizes damage to the rope.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Winch Accessories
The following accessories are necessary to attach the
winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe
winching.
Gloves: Wire rope, through
use, will develop ⬙barbs⬙
which can slice skin. It is ex-
tremely important to wear
protective gloves while oper-
ating the winch or handling
the wire rope. Avoid loose fit-
ting clothes or anything that
could become entangled in
the wire rope and other mov-
ing parts.
Snatch/Block Pulley: Used
properly, the multi-purpose
snatch block allows you to (1)
increase the winch’s pulling
power; and (2) change your
pulling direction without
damaging the wire rope.
Proper use of the snatch block
is covered in ⬙Before You
Pull.⬙
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Clevis/D-Shackles: The
D-Shackle is a safe means of
connecting the looped ends of
cables, straps and snatch
blocks. The shackle’s pin is
threaded to allow easy re-
moval.
Tree Trunk Protector: Typi-
cally made of tough, high-
quality nylon, it provides the
operator an attachment point
for the winch rope to a wide
variety of anchor points and
objects, as well as protect liv-
ing trees.
Operating Your Winch
WARNING!
Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding
proper winch usage may result in severe injury.
•
Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook
when spooling wire rope in or out.
•
Never use as a hoist.
•
Never use to move persons.
•
Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity.
•
Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling
the wire rope.
•
Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or
under load.
•
Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is
under load, wire rope is in tension, or wire rope
drum is moving.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep
others away during winching.
•
Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire
rope, hook and fairlead opening during operation
and when spooling.
•
Never wrap wire rope back onto itself. Always use
a choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk
protector on the anchor.
•
Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to
increase the length of a pull.
•
Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery
strap attached directly to the winch hook.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Never use ⴖbungeeⴖstraps that develop tremen-
dous and potentially dangerous amounts of force
when stretched.
•
Always disconnect the remote control when not in
use.
•
Never winch when there are less than five wraps
of wire rope around the winch drum.
•
Always pass remote control through a window to
avoid pinching lead in door, then using remote
inside a vehicle.
•
Never leave the remote control plugged into the
winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key
points to remember when using your winch are:
1. Always take your time to assess the situation and plan
your pull carefully.
2. Always take your time when using a winch.
3. Use the right equipment for the situation.
4. Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire
rope to slip through your hands when handling the rope.
5. Only the operator should handle the wire rope and
remote control.
6. Think safety at all times.
Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch
CAUTION!
•
Always Know Your Winch: Take the time to fully
read and understand the included Installation and
Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to Winching
Techniques, in order to understand your winch
and the winching operation.
•
Always inspect winch installation and wire rope
condition before operating the winch. Frayed,
kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced
immediately. Loose or damaged winch installation
must be corrected immediately.
•
Always be sure any element which can interfere
with safe winching operations is removed prior to
initiating winching.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Always keep remote control lead clear of the
drum, wire rope and rigging.
•
Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed wires, or loose
connections. Replace if damaged.
•
Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar
through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch for
proper snugness.
1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for
damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or
rope shows excessive wear or damage.
2. Put on gloves.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the
winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to
disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power.
4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free
the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook
strap to the hook (if not attached).
Free Spool Hook Strap
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire
rope to reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a certain
amount of tension on the wire as it can become twisted
and over-wrapped when slackened, leading to wire rope
damage. To prevent losing the end, hold the hook strap
while you work.
6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established
your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or
choker-chain around the object.
Tree Trunk Protector
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Always be certain the anchor you select will with-
stand the load.
NOTE: How to choose an anchor point: A secure
anchor is critical to winching operations. An anchor must
be strong enough to hold while winching. Natural an-
chors include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as
low as possible. If no natural anchors are available when
recovering another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the
anchor point. In this case, be sure to put the transmission
in NEUTRAL, apply the hand brake and block its wheels
to prevent your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll want
an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the
direction the vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope
to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An
anchor point as far away as possible will provide the
winch with its greatest pulling power.
7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.
Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain
and through the hook loop, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the
clutch lever on the winch to engage.
Clevis/D-Shackles
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or
disengaged.
9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,
located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let the
remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If you
choose to control the winch from inside your vehicle,
always pass the remote through a window to avoid
pinching the cord in the door. Always disconnect the
remote control when not in use.
10. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote con-
trol switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack
remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand well
clear of it and never step over it.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are
secured and free of debris before continuing with the
winching procedure.
12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly
wound around the spooling drum. Improper winding
can cause damage to the wire rope.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
13. In certain situations you
may decide to throw a heavy
blanket or similar object over
the wire rope. A heavy blan-
ket can absorb energy should
the wire rope break. Place it
on the wire rope midway be-
tween the winch and the an-
chor point. Do this before the
wire rope is put under ten-
sion. Do not approach or move the blanket once tension
is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead.
If it is necessary to move or remove the blanket, slack the
tension on the wire rope first.
14. Establish ⴖno peopleⴖzones: Make your intentions
clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity
surrounding the winching operation is completely aware
of your intentions before you pull. Declare where the
spectators should not stand - never behind or in front of
the vehicle and never near the wire rope or snatch
block. Your situation may have other ⴖno peopleⴖzones.
15. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine
on and light tension already on the wire rope, begin
winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire rope
is winding evenly and tightly around the spooling drum.
No People Zones
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
For additional assistance, the winched vehicle can be
slowly driven while being pulled by the winch. Continue
pulling until the vehicle is on stable ground. If you are
able to drive the vehicle, the winching operation is
complete.
NOTE:
•
Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended
winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the
winch motor to cool down.
•
What to look for under load: The wire rope must
always spool onto the drum as indicated by the drum
rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in, make
sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on the
drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from draw-
ing into the inner wraps, binding and damaging the
wire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the control
switch intermittently to take up wire rope slack. Shock
loads can momentarily far exceed the winch and wire
rope ratings. During side pulls the wire rope tends to
stack up at one end of the drum. This stack can become
large enough to cause serious damage to the winch.
So, line up pulls as straight ahead as possible and stop
winching if the wire rope comes close to the tie rods or
mounting plate. To fix an uneven stack, spool out that
Using The Remote Control
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
section of the rope and reposition it to the opposite end
of the drum, which will free up space for continued
winching.
16. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle’s is
complete, be sure to secure the vehicle’s brakes and put
the transmission in PARK. Release tension in the wire
rope.
17. Disconnect the wire rope, and disconnect from the
anchor.
18. Rewind the wire rope. The person handling the wire
rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide through
the hand, control the winch at all times.
WARNING!
To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers
inside the hook area as you are powering-in.
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: How to spool under no load: Arrange the
remote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch.
Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when
spooled. Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling
drum is wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and
straighten the layer if necessary. Keep the wire rope
under light tension and spool the wire rope back and
onto the winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to
tighten and straighten the layers as necessary. Repeat this
process until the winch hook is the same distance as the
full length of the remote control from the winch. Pinch
the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach
the hook strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb
and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope. Walk the
wire rope towards the fairlead, carefully spooling in the
remaining wire rope. By pulsing the remote control
switch.
19. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow
hook.
20. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote
control cord from the control box and store in a clean and
dry place. Winching operations are now complete. Put
the cap on the solenoid plug-in.
NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected,
clean, dry area.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Rigging Techniques
Various winching situations will require application of
other winching techniques. These could range from too
little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight
line rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or main-
taining a straight-line pulling situation. You will have to
assess what technique is correct for your situation. Think
⬙safety⬙at all times.
How To Change The Pulling Direction
Change Pulling Directions
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
All winching operations should have a straight line from
the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the
wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting
pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch
block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle
will enable you to change your pulling direction while
still allowing the wire rope to be at 90° to wind properly
onto the spooling drum.
Increasing Pulling Power
In some cases, you may find yourself needing more
pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases me-
chanical advantage and that increases your pulling
power.
Double Line
Because pulling power decreases with the number of
layers of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a
snatch block to double line out more wire rope. This
decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum,
and increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough
wire rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
vehicle’s frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through
a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the
snatch block, pull out enough wire to reach your anchor
point. Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure
to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker
chain. Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the
two ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to over
tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-
tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
•
Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
•
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-
ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-
rized dealer.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
MULTI-DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM (MDS)
(IF EQUIPPED) — 5.7L ENGINE ONLY
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting
off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
NOTE: The MDS system may take some time to return
to full functionality after a battery disconnect.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the
transmission in PARK.
The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, pull the parking brake release
handle.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
Parking Brake Release
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
•
This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied whenever the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Never use the PARK position as a substitute for
the parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or damage.
•
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured.
•
Do not leave the key fob in the vehicle. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
•
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-
tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine off), the
brakes will still function. However, you will experience a
substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.
If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal
braking capability, the remaining system will still func-
tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This
will be evident by increased pedal travel during applica-
tion, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and
activation of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” (if equipped) during brake use.
3500 Dual Rear Wheel Models Only
The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-
boost unit which shares fluid with the power steering
system. You may experience some clicking or hissing
noises from the hydro-boost system during hard braking
conditions.
NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be
higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches
operating temperature.
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system that includes Anti-Lock Brake Sys-
tem (ABS), Traction Control System (TCS), Brake Assist
System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) and Trailer Sway Control (TSC). All of the
systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions, and are commonly
referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The ABS aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
NOTE: ABS improves steering control of the vehicle
during hard braking maneuvers.
WARNING!
•
ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that af-
forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
•
The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
•
The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS) – If Equipped
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s), and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS functions similarly to a
limited-slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
the “Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section of this manual. This brake
pressure modulation transfers drive torque from slipping
to non-slipping wheels to provide optimal forward
traction.
Brake Assist System (BAS) – If Equipped
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
BAS detects an emergency braking situation by sensing
the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. The system
applies optimum pressure to the brakes in emergency
braking conditions. This can help reduce braking dis-
tances. The BAS complements the ABS. Applying the
brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
receive the benefit of BAS, you must apply continuous
braking pressure during the stopping sequence. Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired.
Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
•
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the
traction afforded.
(Continued)
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing.
•
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – If Equipped
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver in
launching a vehicle on an incline. HSA will maintain the
level of brake pressure the driver inputs for a short
duration once the driver takes his foot off of the brake
pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle during this
short duration, the system will release brake pressure
and the vehicle will roll down the incline. The system will
release brake pressure in proportion to the amount of
throttle applied.
During operation, HSA will activate the brake control
system and a clicking noise may occur. If your foot is on
the brake pedal during operation you may feel a slight
pedal movement. The clicking and pedal movement is
normal and both will stop when HSA becomes inactive.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•
Vehicle must be stopped
•
Vehicle must be on a 7% or greater incline
•
Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
7%), with a loaded vehicle or while pulling a trailer
where the system will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, which could cause a collision with an-
other vehicle or object. Always remember the driver
is responsible for braking the vehicle.
The system will only work if the intended direction of the
vehicle and vehicle gear match. For example, if the
intended direction is forward up a hill and the vehicle is
in DRIVE and the activation criteria are met, HSA will
activate.
The system will work in REVERSE and all forward gears,
and will not activate if the vehicle is placed in
NEUTRAL.
Towing And Hauling With HSA
The HSA system does not know if your vehicle is loaded
or towing a trailer unless the TOW/HAUL switch, lo-
cated on the center stack, is selected. When activated, the
“TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. Refer to “Automatic Transmission” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information. In
order to accommodate the extra weight entailed under
towing and hauling conditions and to increase driver
comfort while launching on a hill, the system recognizes
when the TOW/HAUL switch is activated and compen-
sates by releasing brake pressure at a slower rate while
throttle is applied in order to prevent the vehicle from
rolling down the hill.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the incline while resuming accelera-
tion, manually activate the trailer brake or apply
more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the
brake pedal. Always remember the driver is re-
sponsible for braking the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
HSA is not a parking brake. If you stop the vehicle
on a hill without putting the transmission in
PARK or using the parking brake, it will roll down
the incline and could collide with another vehicle,
object or person, and cause serious or fatal injury.
Always remember to use the parking brake while
parking on a hill and that the driver is responsible
for braking the vehicle.
HSA Off
Non-EVIC Equipped Vehicles
If you wish to turn off the HSA system, follow this
procedure:
1. Start with the engine OFF, and the vehicle in PARK
with the wheels straight.
2. Start the engine.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
3. With the engine running and the brake applied, rotate
the steering wheel 180° counterclockwise from center.
4. Press the “ESC Off” switch four times within 20 sec-
onds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should appear and
disappear four times.
5. Rotate the steering wheel 360° clockwise (180° clock-
wise from center).
6. Cycle ignition switch OFF then ON.
7. If the sequence was completed properly, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm HSA
is off.
Steps 1 through 7 must be completed within 90 seconds
to turn off HSA. Repeat steps 1 through 7 to re-enable
HSA functionality.
EVIC Equipped Vehicles
HSA is a Customer Programmable Feature on a EVIC
equipped vehicle. If you wish to turn off the HSA feature,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) – If Equipped
The ESC system enhances directional control and stabil-
ity of the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC
corrects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition.
Engine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle
path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual
path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match
the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-
priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or
understeer condition.
•
Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•
Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
All Two-Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four-Wheel
Drive Vehicles In 2WD, 4WD AUTO, Or 4WD
LOCK Modes Can Choose The Following ESC
Operating Modes:
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC in 2WD/4WD
AUTO/4WD LOCK modes and in 2WD vehicles. When-
ever the vehicle is started or the transfer case (if
equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOW or Neutral, back to
4WD LOCK or 4WD AUTO, the ESC system will be in
this mode. This mode should be used for almost all
driving situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial
Off” or “ESP Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from loss of vehicle control
due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped ve-
hicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
ESC Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch. When in ⬙Partial Off⬙mode, the TCS portion
of ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described in
the TCS section, has been disabled and the ⬙ESC Off
Indicator Light⬙will be illuminated. All other stability
features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended
to be used if the vehicle is in deep snow, sand, or gravel
conditions and more wheel spin than ESC would nor-
mally allow is required to gain traction. To turn ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch. This will
restore the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa-
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
the vehicle is in motion.
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
In the “Partial Off” mode, the engine torque reduc-
tion and stability features are desensitized. There-
fore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
reduced.
All Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD AUTO And
4WD LOCK Modes Can Also Choose The
Following ESC Operating Mode. This Is The Only
ESC Operating Mode in 4WD LOW:
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-road use when ESC stabil-
ity features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to
trail conditions. This mode is entered by pressing and
holding the “ESC Off” switch for five seconds when the
vehicle is stopped and the engine is running. After five
seconds, the “ESP Off Indicator Light” will illuminate
and the “ESC Off” message will appear in the odometer.
Press and release the trip odometer button located on the
instrument cluster to clear this message.
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed
into the PARK position from any other position and then
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
the message was previously cleared.
In this mode, ESC and TCS except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At
40 mph (64 km/h) the system returns to “Partial Off”
mode, described above. When the vehicle speed drops
below 35 mph (56 km/h) the ESC system shuts off. ESC
is off at low vehicle speeds so that it will not interfere
with off-road driving but ESC function returns to provide
the stability feature at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” will always be illuminated
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again, momentarily
press the “ESC Off” switch. This will restore the normal
“ESC On” mode of operation.
“ESC Off” is the only operating mode for ESC in 4WD
LOW. Whenever the vehicle is started in 4WD LOW or
the transfer case (if equipped) is shifted from 4WD LOCK
or NEUTRAL, to 4WD LOW, the ESC system will be in
this mode.
WARNING!
With the ESC switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESC is unavailable. In an emer-
gency evasive maneuver the ESC system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off”
mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) – If Equipped
The TSC system uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take the appro-
priate actions to attempt to stop the sway. The system
may reduce engine power and apply the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.
TSC will become active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized. No driver action is re-
quired. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from
swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer
to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information. When TSC is functioning, the “ESP
Off Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power may be
reduced and you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer from
swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in the
“Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
TSC is only active in the default “ESC On” mode. TSC
can be disabled by pressing the “ESC Off” switch and
entering “ESC Partial Off” mode. It is not active in the
“ESC Partial Off” or “ESC Off” modes. Refer to the ESC
portion of this section for an explanation of the different
ESC operating modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety
Standards Code (TIN) 4 — Maximum Load
2 — Size Designation 5 — Maximum Pressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•
European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•
LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
•
Temporary spare tires are spares designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: T145/80D18 103M.
•
High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
TorS= Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R= Construction code
—⬙R⬙means radial construction
—⬙D⬙means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ= Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the
vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less
than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period. Inflation
pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or
kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold
tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pres-
sure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the
vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
Tire and Loading Information Placard
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE:
•
The following table shows examples on how to calcu-
late total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•
For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
•
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•
Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in over-heating and tire failure.
•
Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•
Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect
vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting
in loss of vehicle control.
•
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve-
hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
•
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases
tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel
consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. Refer to “Supple-
mental Tire Pressure Information” in “Starting and Op-
erating” for further information.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla-
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in the
case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equivalent with a spare tire and
wheel in look and function as the original equipment tire
and wheel found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your
vehicle. If your vehicle has this option refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equip-
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempo-
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo-
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare – If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•
Driving style
•
Tire pressure
•
Distance driven
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE
INFORMATION — IF EQUIPPED
A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-
gers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo.
Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle
will be found on the face of the driver’s door.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
TIRE CHAINS
Use “Class S” chains, or other traction aids that meet SAE
Type “S” specifications.
Use “Class U” chains on 2500/3500 model trucks, or
other traction aids that meet SAE Type “U” specifica-
tions.
NOTE: Chains must be the proper size for the vehicle as
recommended by the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle, tires or chains,
observe the following precautions:
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Because of limited chain clearance between tires
and other suspension components, it is important
that only chains in good condition are used. Bro-
ken chains can cause serious vehicle damage. Stop
the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could
suggest chain breakage. Remove the damaged
parts of the chain before further use.
•
Install chains as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about 0.5 mile (0.8 km).
•
Do not exceed 45 mph (72 km/h).
•
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•
Do not install tire chains on front wheels of 4x2
vehicles.
•
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions
on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage. Always use the lower sug-
gested operating speed of the chain manufacturer
if different than the speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
These cautions apply to all chain traction devices, includ-
ing link and cable (radial) chains.
NOTE:
•
On 4x2 and 4x4 1500 model trucks, the use of class “S”
snow chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of
trucks equipped with P265/70R17 tires.
•
On 4x2 2500 model trucks, the use of class “U” snow
chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks
equipped with LT245/70R17 or LT265/70R17 tires.
•
On 4x4 2500 model trucks, the use of class “U” snow
chains is permitted on the rear wheels only of trucks
equipped with LT245/70R17, LT265/70R17, or LT285/
70R17 tires.
•
On 4x2 and 4x4 3500 SRW (Single Rear Wheel) model
trucks, the use of class “U” snow chains is permitted
on the rear wheels only of trucks equipped with
LT265/70R17 tires.
•
On 4x2 and 4x4 3500 DRW (Dual Rear Wheel) model
trucks, the use of class “U” snow chains is permitted
on the front and rear wheels of trucks equipped with
LT235/80R17 tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
CAUTION!
Do not use tire chains on the front wheels of any
model except for 3500 DRW (Dual Rear Wheel)
trucks equipped with LT235/80R17 tires. There may
not be adequate clearance for the chains and you are
risking structural or body damage to your vehicle. Do
not use tire chains on the rear wheels of 1500 model
trucks equipped with LT275/70R17, P275/60R20, or
285/45R22 tires. There may not be adequate clearance
for the chains and you are risking structural or body
damage to your vehicle.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-
formed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Directional Tires – If Equipped
For the R/T package with 22” tires & wheels, tire rotation
must be performed with consideration of the tire rotation
direction. The recommended rotation pattern for direc-
tional tires is shown below.
Dual Rear Wheels – If Equipped
The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be
matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.
To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all
four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.
Tire Rotation
Tire Rotation
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
3500 Dual Rear Tires have only one approved direc-
tion of rotation. This is to accommodate the asym-
metrical design (tread pattern) of the On/Off-Road
tire and the use of Outline White Letter (OWL) tires.
•
When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to
be remounted on the rim, or installed at a different
location, to maintain the correct placement of the
tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position
on the truck. For example, if the spare is used to
replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re-
mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished
inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical
tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will
maintain proper position.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the TPM
Telltale Light to turn off. The system will automatically
update and the TPM Telltale Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle
may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-
tion.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the TPM
Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
TPM Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pres-
sure value.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
•
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when us-
ing replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
•
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
•
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
•
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPM Telltale Light.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
•
Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module,
•
Four TPM sensors, and
•
TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The matching full size spare
can be used in place of any of the four road tires. The TPMS
will only monitor the pressure in the full size spare when it
is used in place of a road tire. Otherwise, a spare with a
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE”
message will display in the EVIC, and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. Should this occur, you should stop
as soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each
tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update and the TPM Telltale Light will
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. If the ignition
switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat, providing the
system fault still exists. The TPM Telltale Light will turn
off when the fault condition no longer exists. A system
fault can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound,
a “LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message will be displayed,
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light and “LOW
TIRE PRESSURE” text message, as long as no tire pres-
sure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
Premium System – If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•
Receiver module,
•
Four TPM sensors,
•
Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), and
•
TPM Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be
used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a
pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the
TPM Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The TPM Telltale Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four
active road tires. In addition, the EVIC will display a
“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” message for a minimum of five
seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing.
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those
flashing in the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure inflation value. Once the
system receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the graphic display in the
EVIC will stop flashing, and the TPM Telltale Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the TPM Telltale Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being
received.
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the TPM Telltale Light will no longer
flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will no
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
The EVIC will also display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault possibly related to an incorrect sensor location fault
is present. In this case, the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message is then followed by a graphic display with
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres-
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be in the correct vehicle position. The
system still needs to be serviced as long as the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message exists.
Vehicles With Full Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound
and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the
EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic
showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF,
as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 525
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) Tire Light
Load Inflation Switch Description (2500 Models) –
If Equipped
WARNING!
Never operate your vehicle with the TPMS and tire
pressures set to the Light Load Inflation Pressure
settings if carrying more than two occupants (150 lbs
[68 kg] each) plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo. The vehicle
“Light Load Definition” is found in the Supplemen-
tal Tire Pressure Information Label which is located
on the rear face of the driver door opening. Failure to
do so may cause you to lose control resulting in a
collision, causing serious or fatal injury.
The TPMS tire light load inflation switch will allow the
driver to switch between the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold and the light load
inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning threshold
depending on the vehicle’s load condition. The Tire and
Loading Information label defines the recommended
front and rear cold tire inflation pressures for the vehicle
when operating in the Max Load condition. A Supple-
mental Tire Pressure Information label is also available
defining Light Load tire inflation pressures when oper-
ating in the Light Load condition. When the tire light
load inflation switch LED is ON, the TPMS is using the
light load inflation pressure (cold) low inflation warning
thresholds.
526 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Light Load Inflation Switch Operation – If
Equipped
•
This vehicle may have different recommended tire
pressure values between the front and rear tires as
shown in both the Tire Loading Information Label and
the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information Label. It is
also equipped to be driven with tire pressures appro-
priate to either a Light Load condition or the vehicle
Max Load condition.
Tire Light Load Inflation Switch
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 527
•
The tire light load inflation switch will allow the driver
to change between the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold and the light
load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning
threshold depending on the vehicle’s load condition.
Refer to the “Supplemental Tire Pressure Information”
label for the vehicle’s Light Load inflation pressures
and “Tire and Loading Information” label for the
vehicle’s Max Load inflation pressures.
To switch from the max load inflation pressure (cold) low
pressure warning threshold to the light load inflation
pressure (cold) low pressure warning threshold, begin by
placing the ignition switch in the RUN position. Next,
lower all four road tire pressures to the Light Load
Inflation Pressure values as listed on the Supplemental
Example Supplemental Tire Pressure Label
528 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Information label. The Supplemental Tire
Pressure Information label is located on the rear face of
the driver door opening. Use an accurate tire gauge to
check the tire pressures when lowering all four tire
pressures. The vehicle may need to be driven above
15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this updated pressure
information. After all four tire pressures have been
lowered to the Light Load inflation pressures, press the
tire light load inflation switch. If the tire light load
inflation switch’s amber colored LED turns ON, the
TPMS is using the light load inflation pressure (cold) low
pressure warning thresholds.
If the tire light load inflation switch amber colored LED
flashes on and off for 10 seconds, after all four tire
pressures have been lowered to the Light Load inflation
pressures, the pressure in any one of the four tires may
not be at the light load inflation pressure (cold) values as
indicated for the Light Load condition as defined on the
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information label located on
the rear face of the driver door. Using an accurate tire
pressure gauge, re-check the tire pressures for the light
load inflation pressure (cold) value.
WARNING!
It is the driver’s responsibility to change to the max
load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure warning
threshold condition when not driving in the light
load condition as defined as two occupants (150 lbs
[68 kg] each) plus 200 lbs (91 kg) of cargo. The vehicle
“Light Load Definition” is found in the Supplemen-
tal Tire Pressure Information label located on the rear
face of the driver door. Failure to do so may cause you
to lose control resulting in a collision, causing seri-
ous or fatal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 529
To switch back to the max load inflation pressure (cold)
low pressure warning threshold, press the tire light load
inflation switch. It is not necessary to first fill the tires to
the max load inflation pressure (cold) values to switch
the TPMS system to the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning threshold. If after pressing
the tire light load inflation switch, and tire pressures are
below the max load inflation pressure (cold) low pressure
warning thresholds, the TPMS low pressure warning
telltale light (located in the instrument cluster) will turn
ON and a chime will sound. The tire pressures are now
required to be inflated to the max load inflation pressure
(cold) values described on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label. The Tire and Loading Information label is
located on the drivers side B-pillar. If the tire light load
inflation switch LED turns OFF, the TPMS has been reset
and the TPMS is using the max load inflation pressure
(cold) low pressure warning thresholds.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
•
This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the follow-
ing licenses:
United States ...................MRXC4W4MA4
Canada .....................2546A-C4W4MA4
530 STARTING AND OPERATING
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
3.7L and 4.7L Engine
These engines are designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excel-
lent fuel economy and performance when
using high quality unleaded “regular”
gasoline having an octane rating of 87. The
use of premium gasoline is not recom-
mended, as it will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
5.7L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high quality unleaded gasoline having
an octane range of 87 to 89. The manufac-
turer recommends the use of 89 octane for
optimum performance. The use of premium gasoline is
not recommended, as it will not provide any benefit over
regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasoline that meets the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 531
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability for the engine
and fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and driveability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain-
ing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
532 STARTING AND OPERATING
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•
operate in a lean mode
•
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•
poor engine performance
•
poor cold start and cold drivability
•
increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•
drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
•
change the engine oil and oil filter
•
disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
or not his/her gasoline contains MMT. It is even more
important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada,
because MMT can be used at levels higher than those
allowed in the United States. MMT is prohibited in
Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 533
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in unnecessary cost. There-
fore, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emission control system.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate
service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•
The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers are not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentra-
tions of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle
performance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of
the manufacturer.
534 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected
every time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnor-
mal conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired,
drive with all side windows fully open.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 535
FLEXIBLE FUEL (4.7L ENGINE ONLY) — IF
EQUIPPED
E-85 General Information
The information in this section is for Flexible Fuel ve-
hicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a unique
fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Un-
leaded Gasoline Only. This section only covers those
subjects that are unique to these vehicles. Please refer to
the other sections of this manual for information on
features that are common between Flexible Fuel and
gasoline-only powered vehicles.
CAUTION!
Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label can
operate on E-85.
E-85 Fuel Cap
536 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ethanol Fuel (E-85)
E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and
15% unleaded gasoline.
WARNING!
Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could
cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-
ing materials lit in or near the vehicle when remov-
ing the fuel filler tube cap (gas cap) or filling the
tank. Do not use E-85 as a cleaning agent and never
use it near an open flame.
Fuel Requirements
Your vehicle will operate on both unleaded gasoline with
an octane rating of 87, or E-85 fuel, or any mixture of
these two. For best results, a refueling pattern that
alternates between E-85 and unleaded gasoline should be
avoided.
When you do switch fuel types it is recommended that:
•
you do not switch when the fuel gauge indicates less
than 1/4 full
E-85 Badge
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 537
•
you do not add less than 5 gallons (19 Liters) when
refueling
•
you operate the vehicle immediately after refueling for
a period of at least 5 minutes
Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard
starting and/or significant deterioration in driveability
during warm up.
NOTE:
•
When the ambient temperature is above 90° F (32° C),
you may experience hard starting and rough idle
following start up even if the above recommendations
are followed.
•
Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully
compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your
engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be
caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline
additive, such as MOPAR威Injector Cleanup or
Techron may be used.
Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles
(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles
FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-
lated engine oils. These special requirements are included
in MOPAR威engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting
Chrysler Specification MS-6395. The manufacturer re-
quires engine oils that are API Certified and meet the
requirements of Material Standard MS-6395. MS-6395
contains additional requirements, developed during ex-
tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to
Chrysler Group LLC engines. Use MOPAR威or an
equivalent oil meeting the specification MS-6395.
Starting
The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use
when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the
range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), you may experience an
increase in the time it takes for your engine to start, and
a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)
until the engine is fully warmed up.
538 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) is
beneficial for E-85 startability when the ambient tempera-
ture is less than 32°F (0°C).
Cruising Range
Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter
than gasoline, you will experience an increase in fuel
consumption. You can expect your miles per gallon
(mpg)/miles per liter and your driving range to decrease
by about 30%, compared to gasoline operation.
Replacement Parts
Many components in your Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV) are
designed to be compatible with ethanol. Always be sure
that your vehicle is serviced with correct ethanol com-
patible parts.
CAUTION!
Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol
compatible components can damage your vehicle.
Maintenance
CAUTION!
Do not use ethanol mixture greater than 85% in your
vehicle. It will cause difficulty in cold starting and
may affect driveability.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 539
ADDING FUEL
The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel
filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel
door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counter-
clockwise.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
CAUTION!
•
Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
•
A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
•
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
•
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
Fuel Filler Cap
540 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank is being filled.
•
Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
•
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•
Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
•
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 541
This label contains the month and year of manufacture,
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the
bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.
The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and
rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load
weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the
driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front
and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo
area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the
system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,
springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension
components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-
creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-
cle’s GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the label represents the actual tire size on
your vehicle. Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
542 STARTING AND OPERATING
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the front and
rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined
by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-
cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.
The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should
then be determined separately to be sure that the load is
properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-
ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the
front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is
within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the
specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier
items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed
equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 543
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR
or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,
parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the
way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to
lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of
your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
544 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certifica-
tion Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping
link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-
tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen
any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 545
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-
age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-
vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
WARNING!
•
An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability and braking
performance and could result in a collision.
•
Weight distributing systems may not be compat-
ible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Rec-
reational Vehicle dealer for additional
information.
546 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE — Without Weight-Distributing
Hitch (Incorrect)
EXAMPLE — With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 547
Fifth-Wheel Hitch
The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a
coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle
in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel
trailer with a coupling king pin.
Gooseneck Hitch
The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm
which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup
truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted
over the rear axle in the truck bed.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
EXAMPLE — Improper Adjustment of
Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)
548 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
Duty
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
Heavy Duty
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Fifth Wheel/
Gooseneck
Greater than 10,000 lbs
(4540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross
Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drive-
train.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The rear bumper is intended to tow trailers up to
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg) without added equipment or altera-
tions to the standard equipment.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 549
Ram 1500 4x2
ST SLT/Outdoorsman/Sport Laramie
3.7L V-6 4–Speed
Automatic Transmission
Towing: 3,750 lbs
(1701 kg) - max
Payload: 1,860 lbs
(839 kg) - max
——
4.7L V-8 6–Speed
Automatic Transmission
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 7,600 lbs
(3447 kg) - max
Payload: 1,700 lbs
(771 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 7,650 lbs
(3470 kg) - max
Payload: 1,730 lbs
(785 kg) - max
—
5.7L HEMI威V-8 6–Speed
Automatic Transmission
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 10,400 lbs
(4717 kg) - max
Payload: 1,660 lbs
(753 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 10,450 lbs
(4740 kg) - max
Payload: 1,670 lbs
(757 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 10,050 lbs
(4559 kg) - max
Payload: 1,610 lbs
(730 kg) - max
550 STARTING AND OPERATING
Ram 1500 4x4
ST SLT/Outdoorsman/Sport Laramie
4.7L V-8 6–Speed
Automatic Transmission
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 7,400 lbs
(3356 kg) - max
Payload: 1,540 lbs
(698 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 7,450 lbs
(3379 kg) - max
Payload: 1,560 lbs
(708 kg) - max
—
5.7L HEMI威V-8 6–Speed
Automatic Transmission
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 10,250 lbs
(4649 kg) - max
Payload: 1,510 lbs
(685 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 10,250 lbs
(4649 kg) - max
Payload: 1,530 lbs
(694 kg) - max
Towing: 5,000 lbs
(2268 kg) - std 9,850 lbs
(4468 kg) - max
Payload: 1,610 lbs
(730 kg) - max
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 551
Ram 2500 & 3500
2500 Power Wagon威2500 ST SLT Bighorn/
Lonestar Laramie Out-
doorsman
3500 ST SLT Bighorn/
Lonestar Laramie Out-
doorsman
5.7L HEMI威V-8 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission
Towing: 10,100 lbs
(4581 kg) - max
Payload: 1,780 lbs
(807 kg) - max
Towing: 12,300 lbs
(5579 kg) - max
Payload: 3,120 lbs
(1415 kg) - max
—
6.7L Cummins威Turbo
Diesel I-6 6-Speed
Manual Transmission —
Towing: 13,350 lbs
(6055 kg) - max
Payload: 2,490 lbs
(1129 kg) - max
Towing: 14,050 lbs
(6372 kg) - max
Payload: 5,050 lbs
(2291 kg) - max
6.7L Cummins威Turbo
Diesel I-6 6-Speed
Automatic Transmission —
Towing: 15,450 lbs
(7008 kg) - max
Payload: 2,580 lbs
(1170 kg) - max
Towing: 22,700 lbs
(10296 kg) - max
Payload: 5,130 lbs
(2327 kg) - max
552 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-
mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website
addresses:
•
http://www.ramtrucks.com.
•
http://www.ramtruck.ca (Canada).
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely side to side which will cause loss of control of
the vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier in
front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•
The tongue weight of the trailer
•
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle
•
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 553
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading In-
formation Placard” in “Starting and Operating” for fur-
ther information.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle.
This helps the engine and other parts of the
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
554 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
•
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
•
Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission
in PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure
the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or ⴖchockⴖthe trailer wheels.
•
GCWR must not be exceeded.
•
Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Trailer tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
utilized (This requirement may limit the ability to
always achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue
weight as a percentage of total trailer weight).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 555
Towing Requirements – Tires
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer with less than the full
size spare tire.
•
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
•
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
•
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
•
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•
An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
556 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for addi-
tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped
Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Mod-
ule (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic
(EOH) trailer brakes.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 557
NOTE: This module has been designed and verified
with electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydrau-
lic systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be
compatible with ITBM.
The user interface consists of the following:
GAIN/ Brake Output Power Display
Shows the current GAIN setting.
This display may also be used to display diagnostic
information, if needed.
•
SC — Short Circuit to Ground
•
Sb — Short to Battery
•
CF — Controller Fault – If this message appears on the
display, see your authorized dealer.
When the vehicle brakes are applied, the display will no
longer show GAIN and will change to the output to the
trailer brakes.
Manual Brake Control Lever
Slide the manual brake control lever to the right to
activate power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent
of the tow vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control
1 — GAIN/Brake Output Power Display
2 — Manual Brake Control Lever
3 — Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
4 — GAIN Adjustment Buttons
558 STARTING AND OPERATING
lever is activated while the brake is also applied, the
greater of the two inputs determines the power sent to
the trailer brakes.
The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on
when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are
applied.
Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light
This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.
If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is
turned on, pressing the GAIN adjustment button or
sliding the manual brake control lever will display the
GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will not be displayed.
If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated
Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status
Indicator Light” will flash.
GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)
Pressing these buttons will adjust the brake control
power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The
GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or
decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).
GAIN
The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control
for the specific towing condition and should be changed
as towing conditions change. Changes to towing condi-
tions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions
and weather.
Adjusting GAIN
NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free
environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph
(30–40 km/h).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 559
1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working
condition, functioning normally, and properly adjusted.
See your trailer dealer if necessary.
2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec-
tions according to the trailer manufacturer’s instructions.
3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged
in, the trailer connected message should appear in the
EVIC (if the connection is not recognized by the ITBM,
braking functions will not be available), the GAIN setting
will illuminate and the correct type of trailer must be
selected from the EVIC options.
4. Press the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel
until System Setup appears on the screen.
5. Press the SELECT button and then press the UP or
DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake Type appears on the
screen.
560 STARTING AND OPERATING
6. Press the SELECT button and then press the UP or
DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type
appears on the screen.
NOTE: 1500 Models Only – Light Electric and Heavy
Electric will only be available due to the tow capacities of
the vehicle.
7. Use the GAIN adjustment (+/-) buttons to increase or
decrease the GAIN setting to the desired starting point. A
GAIN setting of 5 is a good starting point.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 561
8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,
level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h) and
squeeze the manual brake control lever completely.
9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing
tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels turn
freely, increase the GAIN setting.
Repeat Steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point
just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier
trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even
with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.
EVIC Display Messages
The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Display messages,
along with a single chime, will be displayed when a
malfunction is determined in the trailer connection,
trailer brake control, or on the trailer. Refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
CAUTION!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result
in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.
WARNING!
Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the
ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss
of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-
ping distance or trailer instability which could result
in personal injury.
NOTE:
•
An aftermarket controller may be available for use
with air trailer brake systems and other systems not
562 STARTING AND OPERATING
compatible with ITBM. To determine the type of
brakes on your trailer and the availability of control-
lers, check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.
•
Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may
cause damage to the electrical system and electronic
modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if
an aftermarket module is to be installed.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package will include a four and seven-
pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-
ness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Ground 6 — Right Stop/Turn
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 563
WARNING!
Any work done to the vehicle’s electrical system or
wiring should be performed by a qualified automo-
tive technician. If done improperly it may cause
damage to the electrical system wiring and could
result in serious or fatal injury.
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Automatic Transmission
The “DRIVE” range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, select
“TOW/HAUL” mode (if equipped) or select a lower gear
using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature.
Seven-Pin Connector
1 — Battery 5 — Ground
2 — Backup Lamps 6 — Left Stop/Turn
3 — Right Stop/Turn 7 — Running Lamps
4 — Electric Brakes
564 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Using “TOW/HAUL” mode or a lower gear
range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating
conditions will improve performance and extend trans-
mission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build
up. This action will also provide better engine braking.
The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed if you regularly tow a trailer for more than
45 minutes of continuous operation. Refer to “Mainte-
nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level
before towing.
Tow/Haul
To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-
ing, turn the “TOW/HAUL” feature ON when driving in
hilly areas, or select a lower gear range (using the
Electronic Range Select (ERS) feature) on more severe
grades.
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
−
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
−
When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
−
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
−
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-
mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
−
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 565
−
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
SNOWPLOW
1500 Models Only
NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow
applications.
WARNING!
Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should
not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The
airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in
the front end structure. The airbags could deploy
unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a colli-
sion resulting in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can
cause damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de-
scribed earlier in this manual
2500/3500 Models Only
Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory
installed option. These packages include components
necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.
NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly
recommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow
the recommendations contained within the current Body
566 STARTING AND OPERATING
Builders Guide. See your authorized dealer, installer or
snowplow manufacturer for this information. There are
unique electrical systems that must be connected to
properly assure operator safety and prevent overloading
vehicle systems.
WARNING!
Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely
affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.
Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de-
scribed earlier in this manual
CAUTION!
The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exte-
rior lamps are not properly installed.
Before Plowing
•
Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid
level.
•
Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight-
ness.
•
Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.
The cutting edge should be 1/4 to 1/2 in (6 cm to
1.2 cm) above ground in snow plowing position.
•
Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-
tioning properly.
Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability
For Information about snowplow applications visit
www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body Build-
ers Guide.
1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck
should not exceed two.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 567
2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear
GAWR should never be exceeded.
3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of
options or passengers, etc.
The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow
system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,
options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)
ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Com-
pliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door
opening.
NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pas-
sengers.
Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica-
tions at the factory without consideration for the weight
of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset
if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow
season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.
The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is
parked.
Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip-
ment following the recommendations provided by the
specific snowplow manufacturer.
Over The Road Operation With Snowplow
Attached
The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the
engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.
Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade
completely and position it as low as road or surface
conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The
operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance
and allow adequate passing clearance.
568 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operating Tips
Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)
should be maximum operating speed. The operator
should be familiar with the area and surface to be
cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when
plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.
NOTE: During snowplow usage on vehicles equipped
with outside temperature display, the display may show
higher temperatures than the outside ambient tempera-
ture. The higher displayed temperature is due to blocked
or reduced airflow to the underhood ambient tempera-
ture sensor caused by the snowplow. In addition, on
vehicles equipped with Automatic Temperature Control
(ATC), it is suggested that the interior cabin temperature
be manually controlled should the system not perform as
desired while in automatic mode. Both the outside tem-
perature display and ATC operation will return to nor-
mal when the snowplow is removed.
General Maintenance
Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the
plow manufacturer’s instructions.
Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery
terminals clean and free of corrosion.
When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drive-
train damage, the following precautions should be ob-
served.
•
Operate with transfer case in 4L when plowing small
or congested areas where speeds are not likely to
exceed 15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in
4H.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 569
•
Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4L
range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended
periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.
•
Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has
returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a
practice of stepping on the brake pedal before shifting
the transmission.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
Two-Wheel Drive
Models
Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED
See Instructions
•
Transmission in PARK
•
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
•
Tow in forward direction
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK
570 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recreational Towing – Two-Wheel Drive Models
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.
This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle
trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Firmly set the parking brake. Place the transmission in
PARK.
4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following
the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-
ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.
CAUTION!
•
Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
cause severe transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•
Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid
may leak from the transmission, causing damage
to internal parts.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 571
Recreational Towing – Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift trans-
fer cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recre-
ational towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted
into PARK for recreational towing. Refer to the following
for the proper transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting
procedure for your vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when recreational towing.
•
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the
transfer case.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Automatic transmissions must be placed in the
PARK position for recreational towing.
•
Before recreational towing, perform the procedure
outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to
be certain that the transfer case is fully in NEU-
TRAL (N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.
•
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmission and/or
transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
•
Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because
fluid will leak from the transfer case, causing
damage to internal parts.
•
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar
on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be
damaged.
572 STARTING AND OPERATING
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) – Manual Shift
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging
the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear drive-
shafts from the powertrain and will allow the vehicle
to move, even if the transmission is in PARK. The
parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before
recreational towing to prevent damage to internal
parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. Press and hold the brake pedal.
4. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEUTRAL (N).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 573
9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with transmission in DRIVE.
10. Turn OFF the engine.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) and the engine running. With the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine
is OFF prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
13. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
15. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) – Manual Shift
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired position.
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL
(N), turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid
gear clash.
574 STARTING AND OPERATING
7. Shift the transmission into PARK.
8. Release the brake pedal.
9. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
10. Start the engine.
11. Press and hold the brake pedal.
12. Release the parking brake.
13. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL – Electronic Shift Transfer
Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
recreational towing:
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the
NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the
parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position
disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from
the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to move,
even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 575
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that
the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL before recre-
ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop. Shift automatic
transmission into PARK.
2. Turn OFF the engine.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button
(located by the selector switch). The NEUTRAL indicator
light will blink while the shift is in progress. The light
will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the shift to
NEUTRAL is complete.
7. After the shift is completed and the NEUTRAL light
stays on, release the NEUTRAL button.
8. Start the engine.
9. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
10. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and ensure
that there is no vehicle movement.
11. Repeat steps 9 and 10 with transmission in DRIVE.
12. Turn OFF the engine.
13. Firmly apply the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into PARK.
576 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the trans-
mission is shifted into PARK with the transfer case in
NEUTRAL and the engine running. With the transfer
case in NEUTRAL, ensure that the engine is OFF
prior to shifting the transmission into PARK.
15. Remove the key fob from the ignition switch.
16. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable
tow bar.
17. Release the parking brake.
NOTE:
•
The transfer case cannot be shifted into NEUTRAL
from the 4WD AUTO (if equipped) position.
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, and must
continue to be met until the shift has been completed.
If any of these requirements are not met prior to
pressing the NEUTRAL button or are no longer met
during the shift, the NEUTRAL indicator light will
flash continuously until all requirements are met or
until the NEUTRAL button is released.
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a shift to take place and for the position indicator
lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the
ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no
position indicator lights will be on or flashing.
•
A flashing NEUTRAL indicator light indicates that
shift requirements have not been met.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 577
Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL – Electronic Shift
Transfer Case (If Equipped)
Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for
normal usage:
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-
nected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position, but
do not start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Press and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL button
(located by the selector switch) until the NEUTRAL
indicator light turns off.
7. After the NEUTRAL indicator light turns off, release
the NEUTRAL button.
8. After the NEUTRAL button has been released, the
transfer case will shift to the position indicated by the
selector switch.
NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL,
turning the engine OFF may be required to avoid gear
clash.
9. Shift the transmission into PARK.
10. Release the brake pedal.
11. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
12. Start the engine.
13. Press and hold the brake pedal.
14. Release the parking brake.
15. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake
pedal, and check that the vehicle operates normally.
578 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
•
Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that must be met
prior to pressing the transfer case NEUTRAL button
and must continue to be met until the shift has been
completed. If any of these requirements are not met
prior to pressing the NEUTRAL button, or are no
longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL indicator
light will flash continuously until all requirements are
met or until the NEUTRAL button is released.
•
The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position
for a transfer case shift to take place and for the
position indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
switch is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
not take place and no position indicator lights will be
on or flashing.
•
A flashing NEUTRAL position indicator light indicates
that shift requirements have not been met.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 579
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵Hazard Warning Flashers ................ 583
䡵If Your Engine Overheats ................ 583
䡵Jacking And Tire Changing ............... 584
▫Jack Location ....................... 585
▫Removing The Spare Tire ............... 590
▫Preparations ........................ 591
▫Instructions ........................ 592
▫Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped . . . 599
▫Wheel Nuts ........................ 600
▫To Stow The Flat Or Spare .............. 603
䡵Hoisting ............................ 604
䡵Jump-Starting Procedures ................ 604
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ............. 605
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ............... 606
䡵Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................. 608
䡵Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ...... 609
䡵Shift Lever Override ................... 610
▫Column Shifter — If Equipped ........... 610
6
▫Center Console Shifter — If Equipped ..... 611
䡵Towing A Disabled Vehicle ............... 612
▫Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob ..... 614
▫Two-Wheel Drive Models .............. 614
▫Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles .............. 615
582 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
upper switch bank just below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•
On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle
speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•
If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•
You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 583
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack.
•
Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle,
take it to a service center where it can be raised on
a lift.
(Continued)
584 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack tools are stored under the front
passenger seat.
Removal
To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the
plastic access cover, located on the side of the seat. To
remove the cover, pull the front part of the cover (closest
to the front of the seat) toward you to release a locking
tab. Once the front of the cover is loose, slide the cover
toward the front of the seat until it is free from the seat
frame.
Jack Access Cover
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 585
Remove the jack and tools by removing the wing bolt and
sliding the assembly from under the seat.
Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)
586 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them
in the original carrier and location. While driving
you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid accelera-
tion or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or
other objects in the vehicle may move around with
force, resulting in serious injury.
Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
1. Lower the jack all the way down by turning the jack
turn-screw until the jack is snug.
2. Position the jack and tool bag (unrolled). Make sure
the lug wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.
Turn Screw And Lug
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 587
3. Fold the flap and roll the jack tool kit into a cylindrical
package (in direction of arrows) and tie to the jack using
the tie straps.
Folding Flap And Rolling Bag
Tying Bag To Jack With Straps
588 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding
the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools
under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the
fastener on the floor, and then secure to the floor pan
using the wing bolt. Reinstall the plastic cover.
Jack And Tools Tied Jack And Tools (1500 Series)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 589
Removing The Spare Tire
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the
truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube.
Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower
tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch
mechanism tube. Rotate the wheel wrench handle coun-
terclockwise until the spare tire is on the ground with
enough cable slack to allow you to pull it out from under
the vehicle. When the spare is clear, tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable and pull it through the center of the
wheel.
NOTE: Always stow the spare tire with the valve stem
facing the ground.
Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)
590 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
It is recommended that you stow the flat or spare to
avoid tangling the loose cable.
NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other
power tools is not recommended and can damage the
winch.
Preparations
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
Removing The Spare Tire
1 — Wheel Wrench
2 — Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 591
4. Place the shift lever into PARK. On four-wheel drive
vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if the right front
wheel is being changed, block the left
rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•
Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•
Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•
Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
592 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
•
Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•
If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
•
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.
2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,
the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Placement of the jack:
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 593
•
1500 Series Trucks
When changing a front wheel, place the scissors jack
under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown
below.
Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel
wrench. The tube extension may be used but is not
required.
4X2 Jacking Location
4X4 Jacking Location
594 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel,
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the
drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the
drive tubes extending to the rear.
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts
and adjust the jack position as required.
Rear Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 595
•
2500/3500 Series Trucks
For 2500/3500 4x2 series trucks, when changing a front
wheel, place the bottle jack under the frame rail behind
the wheel. Locate the jack as far forward as possible on
the straight part of the frame.
Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel
wrench. The tube extension, may be used, but is not
required.
For 2500/3500 4x4 series trucks, when changing the front
wheel, assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and
connect the drive tube to the extension tube. Place the
jack under the axle as close to the tire as possible with the
drive tubes extending to the front. Connect the jack tube
extension and wheel wrench.
4x2 Jacking Location
596 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel,
assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the
drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the
axle between the spring and the shock absorber with the
drive tubes extending to the rear.
Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.
4x4 Jacking Location Rear Jacking Location (All)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 597
CAUTION!
Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure
that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts
and adjust the jack position as required.
NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the
dial (thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use
the jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.
4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the
vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle unstable and cause a collision. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. On
single rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel
and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel
nuts toward the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel models
(DRW) the wheel nuts are a two-piece assembly with a
flat face. Lightly tighten the wheel nuts. To avoid the risk
of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the
wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.
6. Using the wheel wrench, finish tightening the wheel
nuts using a crisscross pattern. The correct wheel nut
tightness is 130 ft lbs (177 N·m) torque (1500 Series), 135 ft
lbs (183 N·m) torque for 2500/3500 single-rear wheel
(SRW) models, and 145 ft lbs (197 N·m) for 3500 dual
rear-wheel models. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or at a service station.
598 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-
ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel
in the places provided.
7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel
blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel center
caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap damage.
8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle
jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel) by
hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube in
order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack, and
tools as previously described.
9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.
NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do
not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.
Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped
The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle
off the ground.
For 2500/3500 single rear-wheel (SRW) models, use the
blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry the hub cap off.
Insert the blade end into the pry-off notch and carefully
pop off the hub cap with a back-and-forth motion.
On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must
first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a
hook at one end that will fit in the pry off notch of the
rear hub caps. Position the hook and pull out on the
ratchet firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel
skins can now be removed. For the front hub cap on 3500
models use the blade on the end of the lug wrench to pry
the caps off. The wheel skin can now be removed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 599
CAUTION!
•
Use a back-and-forth motion to remove the hub
cap. Do not use a twisting motion when removing
the hub cap, damage to the hub cap finish may
occur.
•
The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two
pry-off notches. Make sure that the hook of the
jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap
notch before attempting to pull off.
You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pry off the
wheel skins. Insert the flat tip completely and using a
back-and-forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this
procedure around the tire until the skin pops off.
Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When
replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug
nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a
rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins
are firmly seated around the wheel.
Wheel Nuts
All wheel nuts should be tightened occasionally to elimi-
nate the possibility of wheel studs being sheared or the
bolt holes in the wheels becoming elongated. This is
especially important during the first few hundred miles/
kilometers of operation to allow the wheel nuts to
become properly set. All wheel nuts should first be firmly
seated against the wheel. The wheel nuts should then be
tightened to recommended torque. Tighten the wheel
nuts to final torque in increments. Progress around the
bolt circle, tightening the wheel nut opposite to the wheel
nut just previously tightened until final torque is
achieved. Recommended torques are shown in the fol-
lowing chart.
600 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Disc Wheels TypeNut StudSize Hex Size TorqueFt Lbs TorqueNewtonMeters
Cone M14 x 1.5 22 mm 120-150 160-200
Flanged M14 x 1.5 22 mm 130-160 190-220
8-Stud — Dual Rear Wheels
Dual wheels are flat-mounted and center-piloted. The lug
nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are being
rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts and add two
drops of oil at the interface between the hex and the
washer.
Oiling Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 601
Slots in the wheels will assist in properly orienting the
inner and outer wheels. Align these slots when assem-
bling the wheels for best access to the tire valve on the
inner wheel. The tires of both dual wheels must be
completely off the ground when tightening, to ensure
wheel centering and maximum wheel clamping.
Dual wheel models require a special heavy-duty lug nut
tightening adapter (included with the vehicle) to cor-
rectly tighten the lug nuts. Also, when it is necessary to
remove and install dual rear wheels, use a proper vehicle
lifting device.
NOTE: When installing a spare tire as part of a dual rear
wheel end combination, the tire diameter of the two
individual tires must be compared. If there is a significant
difference, the larger tire should be installed in a front
location. The correct direction of rotation for dual tire
installations must also be observed.
These dual rear wheels should be tightened as follows:
1. Tighten the wheel nuts in the numbered sequence to a
snug fit.
Tightening Pattern
602 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Retighten the wheel nuts in the same sequence to the
torques listed in the table. Go through the sequence a
second time to verify that specific torque has been
achieved. Retighten to specifications at 100 miles
(160 km) and after 500 miles (800 km).
It is recommended that wheel stud nuts be kept torqued
to specifications at all times. Torque wheel stud nuts to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
To Stow The Flat Or Spare
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels can-
not be stored under the vehicle because the wheel
retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure
the flat tire in the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is down. Slide the
wheel retainer through the center of the wheel and
position it properly across the wheel opening.
For convenience in checking the spare tire inflation, stow
with the valve stem toward the rear of the vehicle.
Attach the wheel wrench to the extension tube. Rotate the
winch mechanism until the wheel is drawn into place
against the underside of the vehicle. Continue to rotate
until you feel the winch mechanism slip, or click three or
four times. It cannot be overtightened. Push against the
tire several times to be sure it is firmly in place.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 603
HOISTING
A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking
locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca-
tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be
used on any other parts of the underbody.
CAUTION!
Never use a floor jack directly under the differential
housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle
may result.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
604 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
WARNING!
•
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•
Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
•
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Positive Battery Post
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 605
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in per-
sonal injury or property damage due to battery ex-
plosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of the
discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
606 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then start
the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 607
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand or mud, it can
often be moved by a rocking motion. Move the shift lever
rhythmically between DRIVE and REVERSE while ap-
plying slight pressure to the accelerator. In general, the
least amount of accelerator pedal pressure to maintain
the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing
the engine is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the shift lever in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
CAUTION!
•
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving be-
tween DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
•
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no
transmission shifting occurring).
608 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow
hooks.
NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of
damage to the vehicle.
WARNING!
•
Chains are not recommended for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury
or death.
•
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-
ing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a
vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for
tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could
damage your vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 609
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use one of the
following procedures to temporarily move the shift lever:
Column Shifter — If Equipped
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine.
3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the
override tab through the access port (ringed circle) on the
bottom of the steering column.
6. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
Shift Lever Override Access Port
610 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Center Console Shifter — If Equipped
To access the override, carefully remove (using a flat-
bladed screwdriver) the override access cover which is
located on the right of the shift lever gate.
1. Firmly set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
without starting the engine.
3. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
4. Using a screwdriver or similar tool, press and hold the
override tab through the access port on the center con-
sole.
5. Move the shift lever into the NEUTRAL position.
6. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
7. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 611
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial wrecker service. If the
transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational
Towing” in the “Starting and Operating” section.
Towing
Condition
Wheels OFF
the Ground 2WD Models 4WD Models
Flat Tow NONE
If transmission is operable:
•Transmission in NEUTRAL
•30 mph (48 km/h)max speed
•15 miles (24 km) max distance
See instructions in “Recreational Towing”
under “Starting and Operating”
•Transmission in PARK
•Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
•Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
612 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for the purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws applying to
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever
Override” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for instruc-
tions on shifting the automatic transmission out of the
PARK position for towing.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,
do not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 613
Towing Without The Ignition Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is neces-
sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Two-Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-
sion is operable, the vehicle may be towed (with rear
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL. Speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) and the
distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km).
CAUTION!
Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km) with rear wheels on the ground can
cause severe damage to the transmission. Such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be
towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than
15 miles (24 km), tow with the rear wheels OFF the
ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear
wheels on a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable
steering wheel stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the
straight position) with the rear wheels raised and the
front wheels on the ground.
614 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles
The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels
OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the
vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and
the opposite end on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer
case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the
forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF
the transfer case is in NEUTRAL and the transmission is
in PARK. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
•
Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transmission or transfer
case will occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used
when towing.
•
Failure to follow these towing methods can cause
severe damage to the transmission and/or transfer
case. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 615
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵Engine Compartment — 3.7L ............. 620
䡵Engine Compartment — 4.7L ............. 621
䡵Engine Compartment — 5.7L ............. 622
䡵Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) ....... 623
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ........... 623
䡵Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs ............................ 624
䡵Replacement Parts ..................... 625
䡵Dealer Service ........................ 626
䡵Maintenance Procedures ................. 626
▫Engine Oil ......................... 627
▫Engine Oil Filter ..................... 629
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............... 630
▫Maintenance-Free Battery .............. 630
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance ............ 632
▫Front Driveshaft Lubrication – 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive) Models
(Ram Trucks Only) ................... 633
▫Body Lubrication .................... 633
7
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ............... 634
▫Adding Washer Fluid ................. 634
▫Exhaust System ..................... 635
▫Cooling System ..................... 638
▫Brake System ....................... 644
▫Rear Axle And 4X4 Front Driving Axle Fluid
Level ............................. 646
▫Transfer Case ....................... 648
▫Automatic Transmission ............... 648
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion .......................... 651
䡵Fuses .............................. 658
▫Totally Integrated Power Module ......... 658
䡵Vehicle Storage ....................... 663
䡵Replacement Bulbs .................... 664
䡵Bulb Replacement ..................... 665
▫Dual Or Quad Headlamp/Front Park And
Turn Signal — If Equipped ............. 665
▫Fog Lamps ......................... 667
▫Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup
Lamps ............................ 667
▫Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) With Cargo Lamp ............. 669
▫Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped . . . 671
▫Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear
Wheels) — If Equipped ................ 672
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped .......................... 673
䡵Fluid Capacities ...................... 674
䡵Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts ....... 676
▫Engine ............................ 676
▫Chassis ........................... 678
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (If Equipped) 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Battery 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
620 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 4.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Engine Oil Fill
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Battery 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 621
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L
1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick 8 — Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
6 — Battery
622 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•
If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines
that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly
installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator
will display in the EVIC telltale display area.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 623
the SELECT button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of
a normal bulb check.
624 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 625
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•
Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized Chrysler Group LLC
dealership or qualified repair center.
(Continued)
626 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of
your vehicle and also allow extended maintenance
intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these
components as the chemicals can damage your
engine, transmission, power steering or air condi-
tioning. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed
because of component malfunction, use only the
specified fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the
engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check
the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always
maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the
top of the safe zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause
oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage
your engine.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 627
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. The engine oil filler
cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for
your engine. For information on engine oil filler cap
location, refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining
Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a 5.7L engine must use
SAE 5W-20 oil. Failure to do so may result in improper
operation of the Multi-Displacement System (MDS). Re-
fer to “Multi-Displacement System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
628 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
NOTE: For 2500/3500 trucks with a 5.7L engine oper-
ating under a gross combined weight rating of 14,000 lbs
(6 350 kg) or greater, SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recom-
mended for all operating temperatures.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils if the recommended oil
quality requirements are met and the recommended
maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are
followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high-
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR威engine oil filters are a high-quality oil
filter and are recommended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 629
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
(Continued)
630 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•
Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
CAUTION!
•
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 631
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
•
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
632 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-
carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and is an ozone-saving product.
However, the manufacturer recommends that air condi-
tioning service be performed by authorized dealers or
other service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
Front Driveshaft Lubrication – 2500/3500
(Four-Wheel Drive) Models (Ram Trucks Only)
Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil
change. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the
proper maintenance intervals. Use MOPAR威Type MS-
6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubri-
cated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MOPAR威Spray White Lube or equivalent, to assure
quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts
concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and
grit. After lubricating, excess oil and grease should be
removed. Particular attention should also be given to
hood latching components to ensure proper function.
When performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be
cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the
lock cylinder.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 633
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should
be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent only (not ra-
diator antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid reser-
voir, take some washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or
towel and wipe the wiper blades clean. This will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
634 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for
a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or
freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield
washer solution used with water as directed on the
container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point
to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for lubri-
cation or oil change. Replace as required.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 635
WARNING!
•
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can
contact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•
The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions con-
trol device and may seriously reduce engine per-
formance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
636 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 637
Cooling System
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant or
steam from your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to
open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator
is hot.
Engine Coolant Checks
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of
the A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a garden
hose vertically down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.
If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant (anti-
freeze) will begin to drain from the coolant recovery
bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE
CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
638 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended engine cool-
ant (antifreeze). Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
CAUTION!
•
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling system
in an emergency, it should be replaced with the
specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the engine coolant
(antifreeze) and may plug the radiator.
•
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) before replace-
ment. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
period, it is important that you use the same engine
coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 639
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze). When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•
The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or
equivalent.
•
Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
•
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
640 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
•
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up
any ground spills immediately.
Checking Coolant Level – 3.7L, 4.7L, And 5.7L
Engines
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine
coolant should be between the MIN and MAX range on
the dipstick.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 641
To check the coolant level:
1. Open the coolant reservoir.
2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir
neck.
3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.
642 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-
gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once
a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
•
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point in the
radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, contents of
coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against
freezing.
•
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine, which contains aluminum components.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 643
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
•
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Fluid Level Check
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under the hood service or immediately
if the brake system warning lamp indicates system
failure.
The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic
reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a
“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be
kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the
MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.
644 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as
the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in
fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check
should be conducted.
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylin-
der reservoir.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 645
WARNING! (Continued)
•
To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
has been in a tightly closed container. Keep the
master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs moisture
from the air resulting in a lower boiling point.
This may cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard
or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
•
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contami-
nate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could
be damaged, causing partial or complete brake
failure. This could result in a collision.
Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not
required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons
the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be
inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the
fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. This inspection should be made with the vehicle in
a level position.
646 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
For 1500 Model axles, the fluid level should be even with
the bottom of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge
of hole) for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear
axle.
For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be
1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on
the 9.25 in front and 3/4 in ± 1/4 in (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on
10.5 in rear axles. The 11.5 in rear axle level should be
1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will
result in corrosion and possible failure of differential
components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be
encountered in some off-highway types of service, will
require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.
Limited-Slip Differentials
1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip
Differential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR威Limited
Slip Additive or equivalent be added to the gear lubri-
cant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information. The
MOPAR威Limited Slip Additive or equivalent should be
added to the gear lubricant whenever a fluid change is
made.
2500/3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited
slip oil additive (friction modifiers).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 647
Transfer Case
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Lubricant Selection
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler
plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the
filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission perfor-
mance. Use only the manufacturer’s recommended trans-
mission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-
tion. It is important that the transmission fluid be main-
tained at the prescribed level using the recommended
fluid.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission
as the chemicals can damage your transmission
components. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
648 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
•
Using a transmission fluid other than the manu-
facturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterio-
ration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid
will require more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genu-
ine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be checked when the engine is
fully warmed up and the fluid in the transmission is at
normal operating temperature. Operation of the trans-
mission with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce
the life of the transmission and of the fluid. Check the
fluid level whenever the vehicle is serviced.
Check the fluid level while the transmission is at normal
operating temperature 82°C (180°F). This occurs after at
least 15 miles (25 km) of driving. At normal operating
temperature the fluid cannot be held comfortably be-
tween the fingertips.
To check the automatic transmission fluid level properly,
the following procedure must be used:
1. Operate the engine at idle speed and normal operating
temperature.
2. The vehicle must be on level ground.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 649
3. Fully apply the parking brake and press the brake
pedal.
4. Place the shift lever momentarily into each gear posi-
tion ending with the lever in PARK.
5. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until
seated.
6. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on
both sides. The fluid level should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes on the dipstick at normal operat-
ing temperature. Verify that solid coating of oil is seen on
both sides of the dipstick. If the fluid is low, add as
required into the dipstick tube. Do not overfill. After
adding any quantity of oil through the oil fill tube, wait
a minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into
the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.
NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below
the operating temperature, the fluid level should be
between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick
with the fluid at approximately 70°F (21°C) (room tem-
perature). If the fluid level is correctly established at
room temperature, it should be between the “HOT”
(upper) reference holes when the transmission reaches
180°F (82°C). Remember it is best to check the level at the
normal operating temperature.
CAUTION!
Be aware that if the fluid temperature is below 50°F
(10°C) it may not register on the dipstick. Do not add
fluid until the temperature is elevated enough to
produce an accurate reading.
7. Check for leaks. Release parking brake.
To prevent dirt and water from entering the transmission
after checking or replenishing fluid, make certain that the
dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is normal for the
650 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
dipstick cap to spring back slightly from its fully seated
position, as long as its seal remains engaged in the
dipstick tube.
Automatic Transmission Fluid And Filter Change
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: If the transmission is disassembled for any
reason, the fluid and filter(s) should be changed.
It is important that proper lubricant is used in the
transmission. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse affect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•
Stone and gravel impact.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 651
•
Insects, tree sap and tar.
•
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using MOPAR威Car Wash or equiva-
lent, or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels
completely with clear water.
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover or equivalent to remove.
•
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威
Cleaner Wax or equivalent to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
CAUTION!
•
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8 274 kPa) can result in damage or removal of
paint and decals.
Special Care
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
652 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause which destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•
Use MOPAR威Touch Up Paint or equivalent on
scratches as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer
has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
•
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
•
To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR威Wheel Cleaner or equivalent or select a
non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 653
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR威Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•
Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•
For tough stains, apply MOPAR威Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
•
For grease stains, apply MOPAR威Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap
residue.
•
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Use MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent to clean vinyl
upholstery.
MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
654 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog
lights (if equipped) that are lighter and less susceptible to
stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 655
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the car to
wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped
During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On
Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty
hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV
exposure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss
over time.
656 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On
Bedliner, the manufacturer recommends you periodically
rinse all loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your
truck at least twice per year using the MOPAR威
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner available at your local
authorized dealer.
To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On
Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:
1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any
loose dirt and debris.
2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft
cloth or brush.
3. Rinse bedliner with water.
4. Once dry, apply a small amount of MOPAR威
Spray-On Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or
sponge and wipe over the entire surface of the truck
bedliner.
WARNING!
Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean
your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become
slippery and may result in personal injury.
Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many
different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil,
hydraulic fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill
occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as
soon as possible to avoid permanent damage.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 657
Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner
While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a
Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when
loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet across the
floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point is exposed under
the weight of the pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While
not covered by your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix
to cover the metal exposed by the scratch is required. To
repair a tear or gouge, follow the directions provided in
the MOPAR威Quick Repair Kit.
FUSES
Totally Integrated Power Module
The Totally Integrated Power Module is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This center con-
tains cartridge fuses and mini fuses. A description of each
fuse and component may be stamped on the inside cover,
otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is stamped on
the inside cover that corresponds to the following chart.
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
J01 40 Amp
Green
Trailer Tow
J02 30 Amp
Pink
Electric Brake
Totally Integrated Power Module
658 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
J03 30 Amp
Pink
Diesel Powertrain
Control Module – If
Equipped
J04 25 Amp
Natural
Driver Door Node
J05 25 Amp
Natural
Passenger Door
Node
J06 40 Amp
Green
Antilock Brakes
Pump/Stability
Control System
J07 30 Amp
Pink
Antilock Brakes
Valve/Stability
Control System
J08 40 Amp
Green
Power Seat
J10 30 Amp
Pink
Sway Bar Module –
If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
J11 30 Amp
Pink
Transfer Case
Module
J12 30 Amp
Pink
Rear Defroster
J13 60 Amp
Yellow
Main Ignition Off
Draw (IOD) Fuse
J14 20 Amp
Blue
Trailer Tow
Lamps/Park Lamps
J15 40 Amp
Green
Front Blower
J17 40 Amp
Green
Starter Motor
Solenoid
J18 20 Amp
Blue
Powertrain Control
Module Transmis-
sion Range
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 659
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
J19 60 Amp
Yellow
Rad Fan Motor HI/
Rad Fan Motor
Low
J20 30 Amp
Pink
Front Wiper
Ground/Low/High
J21 20 Amp
Blue
Washer Control
J22 25 Amp
Natural
Sunroof Module
M1 15 Amp
Blue
Stop Switch Lamp
M5 25 Amp
Natural
115V AC Inverter
M6 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet
(Instrument Panel
or Front Console)/
Rain Snsr
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M7 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet (Rear
Console or Center
Seat)
M8 20 Amp
Yellow
Front Heated Seat
& Steering Wheel
M9 20 Amp
Yellow
Rear Heated Seats
M10 15 Amp
Blue
Hands Free
Module/Vanity
Lamp/Universal
Garage Door
Opener Module
M11 10 Amp
Red
Climate Control
System
M12 30 Amp
Green
Radio/Amplifier
660 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M13 20 Amp
Yellow
Main #2 Instrument
Cluster/Wireless
Control Module/
ITM/Siren/
Multifunction
Switch (Steering
Column Module)
M14 20 Amp
Yellow
Back Up Camera
(Domestic Only)
M15 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Seat
Module(s)/Audio
Telematics/Daytime
Running Lights
Relay/Instrument
Cluster/Transfer
Case Module
M16 10 Amp
Red
Airbag Module
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M18 15 Amp
Blue
Center Stop Lamp
M19 25 Amp
Natural
Automatic Shut-
down 1 and 2
M20 15 Amp
Blue
Instrument Cluster
Interior Lighting
/Sw Steering
Wheel/Sw Bank
M21 20 Amp
Yellow
Automatic
Shutdown 3
M22 10 Amp
Red
Horns (Low/High)
– Right
M23 10 Amp
Red
Horns (Low/High)
– Left
M25 20 Amp
Yellow
Fuel Pump Motor/
Diesel Lift Pump –
If Equipped
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 661
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M26 10 Amp
Red
Driver’s Door
Switch
M27 10 Amp
Red
Ignition Switch
M28 15 Amp
Blue
Powertrain Control
Module
M29 10 Amp
Red
Tire Pressure
Monitor
M30 15 Amp
Blue
J1962 Diag
Connector
M31 20 Amp
Yellow
Back-Up Lamps
M32 10 Amp
Red
Airbag Module
M33 10 Amp
Red
Powertrain Control
Module
Cavity Cartridge
Fuse
Mini
Fuse
Description
M34 10 Amp
Red
Park Assist
Module/Climate
Control System
Module/IR Sensor/
Compass Module
M35 15 Amp
Blue
Left Front & Rear
Parklamps
M36 20 Amp
Yellow
Power Outlet (In-
strument Panel or
Center Console)
M37 10 Amp
Red
Antilock Brakes/
Stability Control
System Module/
Stoplamp Switch
M38 25 Amp
Natural
All Door Lock
&Unlock
662 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
•
When installing the totally integrated power mod-
ule cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
do so may allow water to get into the totally
integrated power module and possibly result in a
electrical system failure.
•
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we
recommend that you take the following steps to mini-
mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:
•
Disconnect the Ignition-Off Draw (IOD) fuse located in
the Integrated Power Module, located in the engine
compartment. The IOD cavity includes a snap-in re-
tainer that allows the fuse to be disconnected without
removing it from the fuse block.
•
As an alternative to the above steps you may discon-
nect the negative cables from both batteries.
•
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 663
NOTE:
•
When reinstalling the IOD fuse push firmly until fully
seated; the gauges in the instrument cluster will do a
full sweep when the ignition switch is turned to the
RUN position. This is a normal condition.
•
When the vehicle is shipped from the factory, the IOD
fuse is in the up or extracted position. If the radio,
interior lamps, keyless entry or other features do not
work with the key OFF, check the position of the fuse
(or check to see if the fuse is blown) to ensure that it is
fully seated. When the IOD fuse is extracted, the
instrument cluster in the odometer window will dis-
play ⬙NO FUSE.”
REPLACEMENT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS – Interior Bulb No.
Overhead Console Lamps ............... TS212-2
Dome Lamp ........................... 7679
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.
LIGHT BULBS – Exterior Bulb No.
Dual Headlamp ......................... H13
Quad Headlamp – Low Beam ............... H11
Quad Headlamp – High Beam ..............9005
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Dual Headlamp) .....3157K
Front Turn Signal Lamp (Quad Headlamp) . . . 3157NA
Fog Lamp .............................9145
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) ..... 921
Rear Cargo Lamp ........................ 921
Cab Roof Marker Lamps .................194NA
Rear Tail/Turn and Stop Lamp ............. 3157K
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker Lamp.............. 194
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) ........ 194
Backup Lamp ........................... 921
Rear License Plate Lamp ...................194
664 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Dual Or Quad Headlamp/Front Park And Turn
Signal — If Equipped
1. Open the hood.
2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the four plastic push-in fasteners that secure
the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both
fender ledges.
4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the
upper radiator seal to the radiator.
5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.
6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment
screws.
7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front
wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the
access hole in the front of the wheel house splash shield.
Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained through this
access hole.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 665
8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house
splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough to
disengage it from the lock post on the back of the front
lamp unit housing.
9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard
edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to disen-
gage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.
10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.
CAUTION!
•
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
•
Always use the correct bulb size and type for
replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may
overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb
socket, or the lamp wiring.
NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp
bulb access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if
equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the
bulb has been replaced.
666 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lamps
1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access
the back of the front fog lamp housing.
2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector
from the fog lamp bulb.
3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise
1
⁄
4
turn to unlock the
bulb from the housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed
sheetmetal.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 667
2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far
enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard
side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap post
retainers in the outer box side panel.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the
bulb socket.
4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to
unlock it from the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.
668 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With
Cargo Lamp
1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to
the body as shown.
2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wir-
ing harness to the body.
3. Turn the desired bulb socket
1
⁄
4
turn and remove the
socket and bulb from housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 669
4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.
CAUTION!
Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it
with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other
oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.
•
Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps
•
Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and
housing.
670 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped
1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.
2. Rotate the socket
1
⁄
4
turn and pull it from the lamp
assembly.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 671
3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.
Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access
to the bulb sockets.
2. Turn the socket
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise to access the
bulb.
3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.
4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
672 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If
Equipped
1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.
2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.
3. Turn the socket
1
⁄
4
turn counterclockwise and remove
from assembly to access the bulb.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.
5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and
housing.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 673
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters
1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models
(Optional) 32 Gallons 121 Liters
2500/3500 Shortbed Models 34 Gallons 129 Liters
2500/3500 Longbed Models 35 Gallons 132 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
3.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
4.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.7 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
5.7L Engine (SAE 5W-30, API Certified). For 2500/
3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight
rating greater than 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).
7 Quarts 6.6 Liters
674 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
U.S. Metric
Cooling System
3.7L Engine (MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 14 Quarts 13 Liters
4.7L Engine (MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant
5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 14 Quarts 13 Liters
5.7L Engine — 1500 Models (MOPAR威Antifreeze/
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 16 Quarts 15 Liters
5.7L Engine — 2500/3500 Models (MOPAR威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
18.7 Quarts 17.7 Liters
5.7L Engine — 2500/3500 Models w/Heavy Duty
(MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
19.2 Quarts 18.2 Liters
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 675
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant MOPAR威Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hy-
brid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine For 2500/
3500 trucks operating under a gross
combined weight rating greater
than 14,000 lbs/(6,350 kg.)
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter MOPAR威Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs – 3.7L Engine ZFR6F-11G (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
676 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Spark Plugs – 4.7L Engine Upper Bank — FR8TE2 (Gap 0.039 in [.99 mm]) Lower Bank — FR8T1332
(Gap 0.051 in [1.30 mm])
Spark Plugs – 5.7L Engine LZFR5C–11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
Fuel Selection – 3.7L and 4.7L
Engines
87 Octane
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine 87 Octane Acceptable - 89 Octane Recommended
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 677
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission - Gasoline
Engines Only
MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威product.
Transfer Case MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent licensed
ATF+4威product.
Transfer Case – BW44–44 Only MOPAR威BW44–44 Transfer Case Fluid or equivalent.
Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive
Models
GL-5 SAE 75W-90 (MS-9763) or equivalent.
Rear Axle – 1500 Models MOPAR威Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip
Rear Axles require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR威Limited Slip
Additive or equivalent.
Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500
Models
Synthetic, GL-5 SAE, 75W-90 or equivalent. Limited-Slip 10.5/11.5 inch
Rear Axles Limited slip additive is not required.
Brake Master Cylinder MOPAR威DOT 3 and SAE J1703 or equivalent. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not
available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended brake fluids.
Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR威Power Steering Fluid +4, MOPAR威ATF+4威Automatic Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent licensed ATF+4威product.
678 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵Maintenance Schedule .................. 680
▫Required Maintenance Intervals .......... 682
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
Depending on operating conditions, the message may
appear as early as 3,500 miles (5 630 km) since last reset.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within
the next 500 miles (805 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
680 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
NOTE:
•
The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change,
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
•
Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
•
Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 8,000 miles (13 000 km) or six months, which-
ever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “In-
strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom-
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
At Each Stop For Fuel
•
Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 681
Once A Month
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
•
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, and transmission and add as needed.
•
Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
At Each Oil Change
•
Change the engine oil filter.
•
Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
NOTE: ** Vehicles built with the 4.7L engine are
equipped with sixteen spark plugs. One set is located on
the top of the engine under the coils and the second set is
located on the side of the engine.
The spark plugs located under the coils are a standard
plug and must be changed every 48,000 miles
(78 000 km).
The spark plugs located on the side of the engine are a
premium plug and must be changed every 96,000 miles
(156 000 km).
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
682 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
8,000 Miles (13,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
8,000 miles (13 000 km).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
16,000 Miles (26,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
16,000 miles (26 000 km).
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 16,000 miles (26 000 km) or
12 months.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 683
24,000 Miles (39,000 km) or
18 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
24,000 miles (39 000 km).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
32,000 Miles (52,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
32,000 miles (52 000 km).
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
684 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
40,000 Miles (65,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
40,000 miles (65 000 km).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
48,000 Miles (78,000 km) or 36 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
48,000 miles (78 000 km).
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).**
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 685
56,000 Miles (91,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
56,000 miles (91 000 km).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
686 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
64,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 64,000 miles (104 000 km).
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s) if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏Change the transfer case fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 687
72,000 Miles (117,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
72,000 miles (117 000 km).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
80,000 Miles (130,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
80,000 miles (130 000 km).
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months or 104,000 miles (169 000 km) whichever
comes first.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
688 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
88,000 Miles (143,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
88,000 miles (143 000 km).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 689
96,000 Miles (156,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before 96,000 miles (156 000 km).
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the ignition cables (4.7L Engine).
❏Replace the top row and side row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine).**
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
❏Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Inspect the transfer case fluid.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for damage, wear, improper looseness or end play;
replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
690 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
104,000 Miles (169,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
104,000 miles (169 000 km).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Flush and replace the engine coolant at
104,000 miles (169 000 km) or 60 months
whichever comes first.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
112,000 Miles (182,000 km) or 84 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
112,000 miles (182 000 km).
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 691
120,000 Miles (195,000 km) or 90 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
120,000 miles (195 000 km).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
❏Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter(s).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
692 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
128,000 Miles (208,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
128,000 miles (208 000 km).
❏Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏Replace the ignition cables (3.7L Engine).
❏Replace the spark plugs (3.7L and 5.7L Engines).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏Change the transfer case fluid.
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
136,000 Miles (221,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
136,000 miles (221 000 km).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 693
144,000 Miles (234,000 km) or 108 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before
144,000 miles (234 000 km).
❏If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏Replace the top row of spark plugs (4.7L Engine). **
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
❏Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the CV joints.
❏Inspect exhaust system.
❏Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals for cracks or leaks and all parts for
damage, wear, improper looseness or end play; replace if necessary.
❏Inspect the front and rear axle fluid, change if using your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet,
off-road or frequent trailer towing.
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
152,000 Miles (247,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏Rotate the tires, rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before
152,000 miles (247 000 km).
❏Lube the front drive shaft fitting
(2500/3500 (4x4) models only).
Odometer Reading Date
Repair Order # Dealer Code
Signature, Authorized Service Center
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
694 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
WARNING!
•
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
•
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your
vehicle could result in a component malfunction
and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 695
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle .............................. 699
▫Prepare For The Appointment ........... 699
▫Prepare A List ...................... 699
▫Be Reasonable With Requests ............ 699
䡵If You Need Assistance ................. 699
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center ..... 700
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ..... 700
▫In Mexico Contact .................... 700
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) ............ 701
▫Service Contract ..................... 701
䡵Warranty Information .................. 702
䡵MOPAR威Parts ....................... 702
䡵Reporting Safety Defects ................ 702
▫In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. .............................. 702
▫In Canada ......................... 703
䡵Publication Order Forms ................ 703
9
䡵Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades ........................ 705
▫Treadwear ......................... 705
▫Traction Grades ..................... 705
▫Temperature Grades .................. 706
698 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers have the
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 699
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer-
ship. They want to know if you need assistance.
•
If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•
Owner’s name and address
•
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•
Authorized dealership name
•
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (866) 726–4636
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
700 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 701
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR姞PARTS
MOPAR威fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
702 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 703
•
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group
LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the
vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia-
grams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practi-
cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled ve-
hicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-by-
step troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
•
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. Included are starting, operating, emergency
and maintenance procedures as well as specifications,
capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
•
1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•
1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
704 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 705
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
706 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
10
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 639
Adding Fuel ........................... 540
Adjustable Pedals .......................173
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 630
Air Conditioner Maintenance ...............632
Air Conditioning ........................356
Air Conditioning Controls ................. 356
Air Conditioning Refrigerant ............. 632,633
Air Conditioning System .............356,360,632
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ............367
Air Pressure, Tires ....................503,511
Airbag ..............................56,65
Airbag Deployment .......................66
Airbag Light ...................63,64,69,87,265
Airbag Maintenance .......................68
Airbag, Side ......................59,62,64,65
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) ...........60,62,65
Alarm (Security Alarm) .................... 19
Alarm Light ...........................254
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ...............19
Alarm, Panic ............................24
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ............. 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio ...................310
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 481
Anti-Lock Warning Light ..................265
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ........ 19
Anti-Theft System ........................ 19
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............. 639,674
Disposal ...........................641
Appearance Care ........................651
Ashtray ...............................207
Assistance Towing ....................... 118
Auto Down Power Windows ................35
Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 98
Automatic Door Locks .....................32
Automatic Headlights .................... 163
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......... 360
708 INDEX
Automatic Transmission ................... 380
Adding Fluid ....................... 650
Fluid and Filter Changes ...............651
Fluid Level Check ................. 648,649
Fluid Type ......................648,678
Gear Ranges ........................381
Shifting .........................390,401
Special Additives ..................... 649
Torque Converter .................... 390
Axle Fluid ..........................646,678
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) ............... 646
B-Pillar Location ........................ 498
Back-Up Camera ........................187
Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System ................ 431
Battery ...............................630
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) .....25
Saving Feature (Protection) .............. 167
Belts, Seat ............................41,87
Body Builders Guide .......................6
Body Mechanism Lubrication ...............633
Brake Assist System ......................482
Brake Control System, Electronic ............. 481
Brake Fluid .........................644,678
Brake System ........................480,644
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..................... 481
Fluid Check ........................644
Master Cylinder .....................644
Parking ...........................478
Warning Light ....................... 260
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...............380
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle ........85
Bulb Replacement ....................... 665
Bulbs, Light ..........................89,664
Cab Top Clearance Lights .................. 671
Calibration, Compass ..................... 281
Camera, Rear ...........................187
10
INDEX 709
Camper ...............................238
Capacities, Fluid ........................ 674
Caps, Filler
Oil (Engine) ........................628
Power Steering ......................477
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) .............640
Car Washes ............................652
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 86,535
Cargo Light ............................166
Cellular Phone ....................... 105,355
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............ 669
Center Lap Belts .........................50
Center Seat Storage Compartment ............214
Certification Label .......................541
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................494
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) .............264,624
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ............. 85
Checks, Safety ........................... 85
Child Restraint ........................ 70,72
Child Restraint Tether Anchors .............76,80
Child Seat ..............................78
Cigar Lighter ........................... 207
Cleaning
Wheels ............................653
Climate Control ......................... 355
Clock .............................290,299
Cold Weather Operation ...................376
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance .............354
Compact Spare Tire ......................506
Compass ..............................280
Compass Calibration .....................281
Compass Variance ....................... 281
Computer, Trip/Travel .................... 277
Connector
UCI .............................. 313
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) .......313
Conserving Fuel ......................276,277
710 INDEX
Console, Overhead ....................... 189
Contract, Service ........................ 701
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ..........640
Cooling System .........................638
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ............. 639
Coolant Capacity ..................... 674
Coolant Level .................... 638,641
Disposal of Used Coolant ............... 641
Drain, Flush, and Refill ................638
Inspection ..........................641
Points to Remember .................. 643
Pressure Cap ........................ 640
Radiator Cap .......................640
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .... 639,674,676
Cupholders ............................209
Customer Assistance ..................... 699
Data Recorder, Event ......................69
Daytime Running Lights ................... 167
Dealer Service .......................... 626
Defroster, Rear Window ...................220
Defroster, Windshield ................88,358,364
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ................. 170
Differential, Limited-Slip .................. 450
Dipsticks
Power Steering ......................477
Disabled Vehicle Towing ...................612
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............641
Door Locks ............................. 30
Door Locks, Automatic ....................32
Door Opener, Garage ..................... 191
Driving
Off-Pavement .......................433
Off-Road ..........................433
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ...................... 452
Driving to Achieve Maximum Fuel Economy .... 276
10
INDEX 711
Dual Rear Wheels .....................516,601
E-85 Fuel ............................. 536
Electric Rear Window Defrost ...............220
Electrical Power Outlets ................... 203
Electronic Brake Control System .............481
Anti-Lock Brake System ................ 481
Brake Assist System ...................482
Electronic Stability Program .............486
Traction Control System ................ 481
Electronic Range Select (ERS) .......... 387,397,408
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ...... 174
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) ............486
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) .... 187
Electronically Shifted Transfer Case ........ 415,422
Emergency Brake ........................ 478
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ............. 608
Hazard Warning Flasher ...............583
Jump Starting .......................604
Overheating ........................583
Tow Hooks .........................609
Emission Control System Maintenance .........624
Engine ..........................620,621,622
Air Cleaner ......................... 630
Block Heater ........................ 377
Break-In Recommendations ..............85
Compartment Identification ........620,621,622
Coolant (Antifreeze) ..................676
Exhaust Gas Caution ................ 86,535
Flooded, Starting .....................376
Fuel Requirements .................... 674
Jump Starting .......................604
Multi-Displacement ...................478
Oil ......................... 627,674,676
Oil Filler Cap ....................... 628
Oil Selection .....................628,674
Oil Synthetic ........................ 629
712 INDEX
Overheating ........................583
Temperature Gauge ...................250
Enhanced Accident Response Feature .......... 66
Entry System, Illuminated ..................20
Ethanol ...............................532
Event Data Recorder ......................69
Exhaust Gas Caution ................... 86,535
Exhaust System .......................86,635
Exterior Lighting ........................ 163
Exterior Lights ..........................89
Filters
Air Cleaner ......................... 630
Engine Oil .......................629,676
Engine Oil Disposal ...................629
Flashers
Turn Signal .................... 89,168,250
Flat Tire Stowage ........................603
Flexible Fuel Vehicles
Cruising Range ...................... 539
Engine Oil ......................... 538
Fuel Requirements .................536,537
Maintenance ........................539
Replacement Parts .................... 539
Starting ...........................538
Flooded Engine Starting ................... 376
Fluid Capacities .........................674
Fluid Leaks ............................. 89
Fluid Level Checks
Brake .............................644
Power Steering ......................477
Fluid, Brake ...........................678
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts .......... 676
Fog Lights .......................164,265,667
Fold Flat Load Floor ..................... 221
Four Wheel Drive .......................411
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .................. 583
10
INDEX 713
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ................... 608
Front Axle (Differential) ................... 646
Fuel .................................531
Adding ...........................540
Conserving ......................276,277
Ethanol ...........................532
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .................. 541
Gauge ............................250
Light .............................259
Methanol ..........................532
Octane Rating ....................531,676
Requirements ....................531,674
Saver Mode ...................... 276,277
Tank Capacity .......................674
Fuel Optimizer .........................276
Fuel Saver ............................. 276
Fuel System Caution .....................540
Fuel, Flexible ........................... 536
Fuses ................................658
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ........... 191
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ............... 541,623
Gasoline (Fuel) ......................... 531
Conserving ......................276,277
Gasoline, Reformulated ...................532
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .................. 250
Fuel ..............................250
Oil Pressure ........................ 254
Speedometer ........................251
Tachometer ......................... 250
Voltmeter .......................... 259
Gear Ranges ...................... 381,391,402
Gear Select Lever Override .................610
General Information ...............18,26,134,530
Glass Cleaning ..........................655
Grocery Bag Retainer .....................219
Gross Axle Weight Rating ..................545
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ................544
714 INDEX
Guide, Body Builders ...................... 6
GVWR ...............................542
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect™) ............. 105
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water ...................... 452
Hazard Warning Flasher ................... 583
Head Restraints ......................... 153
Headlights ............................665
Automatic .........................163
Cleaning ...........................655
High Beam ......................... 168
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ...... 168
Lights On Reminder ..................167
Passing ............................168
Switch ............................163
Heated Mirrors ...................... 102,220
Heated Seats ...........................143
Heater ...............................356
Heater, Engine Block .....................377
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 168
Hitches
Trailer Towing .......................548
Hoisting ..............................604
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . 191
Hood Release .......................... 160
Hub Caps ............................. 599
Ignition ...............................14
Key ............................. 12,14
Ignition Key Removal .....................14
Illuminated Entry ........................ 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ................... 16
Infant Restraint ........................70,71
Inflation Pressure Tires ....................511
Inside Rearview Mirror ....................98
Instrument Cluster .................246,248,250
10
INDEX 715
Instrument Panel and Controls ..............245
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ............. 656
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ............ 658
Integrated Trailer Brake Controls ............. 557
Interior Appearance Care ..................654
Interior Lights ..........................165
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...........170
Introduction .............................4
Inverter Outlet (115V) .....................208
Jack Location ...........................584
Jump Starting ..........................604
Key-In Reminder ......................... 16
Key, Programming ........................18
Key, Replacement ........................17
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ................... 16
Keyless Entry System ......................21
Keys .................................12
Lane Change and Turn Signals ..............168
Lane Change Assist ......................168
Lap Belts .............................. 50
Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................... 41
LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren) .......76
Latches ................................89
Leaks, Fluid ............................ 89
Life of Tires ............................ 509
Light Bulbs ............................. 89
Lights ..............................89,162
Airbag ....................63,64,69,87,265
Alarm ............................254
Anti-Lock ..........................265
Automatic Headlights ................. 163
Brake Assist Warning .................. 490
Brake Warning ......................260
Bulb Replacement .................664,665
Cap Top Clearance ...................671
716 INDEX
Cargo ............................. 166
Center Mounted Stop ..................669
Check Engine (Malfunction Indicator) ...... 264
Courtesy/Reading ....................190
Daytime Running .................... 167
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . 490
Exterior ............................89
Fog ......................... 164,265,667
Four-Wheel Drive Indicator ............. 415
Hazard Warning Flasher ...............583
Headlights .........................163
High Beam ......................168,259
High Beam Indicator .................. 259
High Beam/Low Beam Select ............168
Illuminated Entry .....................20
Instrument Cluster .................246,250
Interior .........................165,190
Lights On Reminder ..................167
Low Fuel .......................... 259
Oil Pressure ........................ 261
Passing ............................168
Seat Belt Reminder ................... 266
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ............ 254
Service .........................664,665
Side Marker ........................ 673
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) ............ 254
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .......262,517
Traction Control .....................490
Transfer Case ....................... 415
Turn Signal .................89,168,665,667
Warning
(Instrument Cluster Description) .......246,250
Limited-Slip Differential ................ 450,647
Loading Vehicle .........................541
Tires .............................. 498
Locks .................................30
Automatic Door ......................32
Child Protection ......................32
10
INDEX 717
Door ..............................30
Power Door ......................... 31
Low Tire Pressure System .................. 517
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) ..............................76
Lubrication, Body .......................633
Maintenance Free Battery .................. 630
Maintenance Procedures ...................626
Maintenance Schedule .................... 680
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....624
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check ....................648
Lubricant Selection ................... 678
Manual, Service .........................703
Memory Seat ........................... 156
Methanol .............................532
Mini-Trip Computer ......................277
Mirrors ................................98
Automatic Dimming ................... 98
Electric Powered ..................... 101
Heated ............................102
Memory ...........................156
Outside ............................99
Rearview ...........................98
Trailer Towing .......................104
Mode
Fuel Saver ....................... 276,277
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ............. 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...............517
Mopar Parts .........................625,702
MTBE/ETBE ...........................532
Multi-Displacement Engine System ...........478
Multi-Function Control Lever ...............167
Navigation System (Uconnect™ gps) ..........187
New Vehicle Break-In Period ................ 85
718 INDEX
Occupant Restraints ...................38,62,66
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) ...........59,60,62,65
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ..............531
Odometer ..........................254,255
Trip ........................... 254,255
Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road) .......... 433,454
Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) .......... 433,454
Oil Change Indicator .................. 257,275
Oil Change Indicator, Reset .............. 257,275
Oil, Engine ......................... 627,676
Capacity ...........................674
Change Interval .....................627
Dipstick ...........................627
Disposal ...........................629
Filter ..........................629,676
Filter Disposal .......................629
Identification Logo ................... 628
Materials Added to ...................629
Pressure Gauge ...................... 254
Recommendation ..................628,674
Synthetic ..........................629
Viscosity ........................ 628,674
Onboard Diagnostic System .............. 623,624
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ...........191
Operating Precautions ....................623
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) ............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors .................. 99
Overdrive .......................389,399,409
Overdrive OFF Switch ...............389,399,409
Overhead Console .......................189
Overheating, Engine ...................251,583
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) ......... 4,703
Panic Alarm ............................ 24
Park Sense System, Rear ................... 177
Parking Brake ..........................478
Passing Light ...........................168
Pedals, Adjustable .......................173
10
INDEX 719
Personal Settings ........................ 282
Pets ..................................85
Pets, Transporting ........................85
Phone, Cellular ......................... 105
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect™) .............105
Pickup Box ............................ 224
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ......... 498
Power
Door Locks ......................... 31
Mirrors ............................101
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) .....203,208
Seats .............................139
Sliding Rear Window ..................221
Steering ........................476,477
Sunroof ...........................200
Windows ........................... 34
Power Steering Fluid .....................678
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ..............55
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ...........................53
Programmable Electronic Features ............ 282
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 21
Radial Ply Tires .........................505
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) .......638,640
Radio Operation ........................ 355
Ramp Travel Index .......................433
Rear Axle (Differential) .................... 646
Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails ............... 236
Rear Park Sense System ...................177
Rear Seat, Folding ....................150,151
Rear Window Features ....................220
Rear Window, Sliding ..................... 221
Reclining Front Seats .....................148
Reclining Rear Seats ......................150
Recorder, Event Data ......................69
720 INDEX
Recreational Towing ...................... 570
Shifting into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . 573,575
Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .................. 574,578
Reformulated Gasoline .................... 532
Refrigerant ............................633
Reminder, Seat Belt ....................... 54
Remote Control
Starting System .......................26
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .................21
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls ........353
Remote Starting System ....................26
Replacement Keys ........................ 17
Replacement Parts ....................... 625
Replacement Tires ....................... 510
Reporting Safety Defects ................... 702
Resetting Oil Change Indicator ...........257,275
Restraint, Head ......................... 153
Restraints, Child ....................... 70,78
Restraints, Occupant ......................38
Rotation, Tires .......................... 515
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle ................. 87
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ...............89
Safety Defects, Reporting ..................702
Safety Information, Tire ................... 492
Safety Tips ............................. 85
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................86
Satellite Radio Antenna ................... 310
Schedule, Maintenance ....................680
Seat Belt Maintenance .................... 656
Seat Belt Reminder ....................... 54
Seat Belts .......................... 38,41,87
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......50
And Pregnant Women ..................55
Child Restraint ...................70,71,74
Extender ...........................55
Front Seat .......................... 41
10
INDEX 721
Inspection ..........................87
Pretensioners ........................53
Reminder ..........................266
Untwisting Procedure ..................49
Seats ..............................139,149
Adjustment .........................139
Child ..............................74
Folding Floor .......................221
Heated ............................143
Memory ...........................156
Power ............................139
Rear Folding ..................... 150,151
Reclining ..........................148
Reclining Rear .......................150
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) ................ 19
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .......... 639,676
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ................... 16
Sentry Key Programming ...................18
Sentry Key Replacement ................... 17
Service Assistance .......................699
Service Contract ......................... 701
Service Manuals ........................ 703
Setting the Clock ..................... 290,299
Settings, Personal ........................ 282
Shift Lever Override ......................610
Shifting ...............................378
Automatic Transmission .......... 380,390,401
Transfer Case ....................... 414
Transfer Case, Shifting into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .................. 573,575
Transfer Case, Shifting out of Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .................. 574,578
Short Message Service (SMS) ................ 126
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage ..............50
Shoulder Belts ........................... 41
Side Airbag .............................64
Signals, Turn ......................89,168,250
722 INDEX
Sliding Rear Window
Power ............................221
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .................512
Snow Plow ............................566
Snow Tires ............................514
Spare Tire ..........................506,507
Spark Plugs ............................ 676
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .............. 174
Speedometer ...........................251
Stabilizer/Sway Bar System ................431
Starting .............................26,375
Automatic Transmission ................375
Cold Weather .......................376
Engine Fails to Start ..................376
Remote ............................26
Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) ............375
Steering
Power ..........................476,477
Wheel, Heated ...................... 172
Wheel, Tilt .........................171
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ..............353
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls .........................353
Storage Compartment, Center Seat ........... 214
Storage, Vehicle ......................366,663
Storing Your Vehicle ......................663
Sun Roof .............................. 200
Supplemental Tire Pressure Information ........511
Sway Control, Trailer ..................... 491
Synthetic Engine Oil ......................629
System, Remote Starting .................... 26
Tachometer ............................ 250
Tailgate ............................... 238
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ........ 360
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant .......250,584
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint ............. 76,80
Text Messaging ......................... 126
10
INDEX 723
Tilt Steering Column ..................... 171
Tip Start ..............................376
Tire and Loading Information Placard ......498,511
Tire Identification Number (TIN) .............496
Tire Markings ..........................492
Tire Safety Information ....................492
Tires ............................ 89,502,705
Aging (Life of Tires) ..................509
Air Pressure ........................502
Chains ............................512
Compact Spare ...................... 506
Dual ...........................516,601
General Information ..................502
High Speed .........................505
Inflation Pressures .................... 503
Life of Tires ........................509
Load Capacity .................... 498,499
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ......... 517
Pressure Warning Light ................262
Quality Grading .....................705
Radial ............................505
Replacement ........................510
Rotation ...........................515
Safety ..........................492,502
Sizes .............................494
Snow Tires ......................... 514
Spinning ...........................508
Tread Wear Indicators .................509
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .............. 553
Torque Converter Clutch .............390,400,410
Tow Hooks, Emergency ................... 609
Towing ............................ 544,612
24-Hour Towing Assistance ............. 118
Disabled Vehicle .....................612
Guide .............................549
Recreational ........................570
Weight ............................ 549
Towing Assistance .......................118
724 INDEX
Traction .............................. 451
Traction Control ......................... 481
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .................491
Trailer Towing ..........................544
Cooling System Tips .................. 565
Hitches ............................548
Minimum Requirements ................554
Mirrors ............................104
Trailer and Tongue Weight .............. 553
Wiring ............................ 563
Trailer Towing Guide .....................549
Trailer Weight .......................... 549
Transfer Case ........................... 648
Electronically Shifted ...............415,422
Fluid .............................678
Transmission ........................... 380
Automatic .................380,390,401,648
Fluid .............................678
Maintenance ........................648
Shifting ...........................378
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 25
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) .................... 21
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . 191
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ........21
Tread Wear Indicators .................... 509
Trip Odometer ....................... 254,255
Turn Signals ................... 168,250,665,667
UCI Connector ......................... 313
Uconnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) ............. 105
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ................705
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 313
Universal Transmitter .....................191
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ..............49
Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area ...............236
10
INDEX 725
Variance, Compass .......................281
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............6
Vehicle Loading ...................... 499,541
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations .............. 7
Vehicle Storage .......................366,663
Voice Recognition System (VR) .............. 134
Voltmeter ............................. 259
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) .......... 246,250
Warnings and Cautions .....................6
Warranty Information .....................702
Washers, Windshield ..................170,634
Washing Vehicle .........................652
Water
Driving Through .....................452
Wheel and Wheel Trim ....................653
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care ................ 653
Wheel Cover ........................... 599
Wheel Nut Torque ....................... 600
Winch ................................ 456
Accessories .........................460
Operation ..........................461
Rigging Techniques ................... 474
Usage .............................456
Wind Buffeting .......................37,202
Window Fogging ........................366
Windows .............................. 34
Power .............................34
Rear Sliding ........................221
Windshield Defroster ......................88
Windshield Washers ................ 169,170,634
Fluid ..........................169,634
Windshield Wiper Blades ..................634
Windshield Wipers .......................169
Wiper Blade Replacement .................. 634
Wipers, Intermittent ......................170
726 INDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehi-
cle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency
signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must
be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must
be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to the
battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This con-
nection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof or
the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in mounting
antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect the accu-
racy or operation of the compass on vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed
away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only fully
shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a
low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than nor-
mal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
Chrysler Group LLC
12D241-126-AD 4th Edition Printed in U.S.A.

Navigation menu